JP2019122483A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that allows information on actual performance of the game machine to be grasped.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention switches game sections according to the execution of a game, calculates specific game information using the number of used game media and the number of imparted game media in a predetermined game state in one game section, and displays it in display means. However, the specific game information is not calculated in a first game section.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In conventional gaming machines, gaming machines capable of providing gaming benefits (such as award balls, award medals, value data, etc.) according to the outcome of the game are generally used.

  Among such gaming machines, there has been a gaming machine which displays information indicating a setting value (theoretical value) of gaming machine performance on a display device (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-116898, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent documents, only the setting value (theoretical value) of the performance of the gaming machine is displayed, and there is a problem that information on the actual performance of the gaming machine can not be grasped. The

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to the actual performance of the gaming machine.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of awarding a predetermined amount of game value as a prize to a player when a provision condition is satisfied by a game using a game value, any of a plurality of gaming states Usage control value while being in a predetermined gaming state in one gaming section, section control section capable of controlling the state, section switching section capable of switching the game section according to the execution of the game The information calculation means capable of calculating specific game information using the amount and the granted game value amount, and the information display means capable of displaying the specific game information on a predetermined display means, The information calculation means is characterized in that the specific game information is not calculated in the first game section.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to grasp information on the actual performance of a gaming machine.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of the lower part of a glass frame. It is a perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a main control device. It is a perspective view which shows the positional relationship of the various elements which comprise a main control apparatus. It is a figure showing an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the memory map of a main-control part. It is a figure which shows the dump list of the memory area in a main-control part. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the area | region for games in the main control part, and the area | region for information. It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time short game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a big winning a prize opening open mode judging table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the various storage areas of the game work area. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initialization process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the initialization opportunity of a main RAM, and an initialization area | region. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure electric-charge control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the big hit judging processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing the big hit game processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing the big hit game end processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the abnormality determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the operation error determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game ball count processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance information calculation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information indicator in each game area. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the example 5 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of a display of an information display. It is a figure which shows the example 7 of a display of an information indicator. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a delivery control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process of a delivery control part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main process of a delivery control part. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process of a production | presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of a production | presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main process of an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a general control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interruption processing of a general control part, and the V blank interrupt processing of a general control part. It is a figure which shows the adjustment mode switching process of a general control part. It is a figure which shows a changeover switch and an adjustment mode selection table. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure centering on the audio | voice control part. It is a figure which shows the structure of the audio | voice channel of an audio | voice control part. It is a figure which shows the audio | voice management table stored in audio | voice ROM. It is a figure which shows the sound volume adjustment process of a general control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case volume adjustment is performed in a customer waiting state. It is a figure showing a concrete example in case volume control is performed during change production. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) in case setting change is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (example of presentation) in case setting change is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) in case RWM clear is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (example of presentation) in case RWM clear is performed. It is a figure showing a concrete example (operation example) in case a control state of a game is recovered. It is a figure which shows the specific example (example of presentation) in case the control state of a game is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) in case setting confirmation is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (example of presentation) in case setting confirmation is performed. It is a figure which shows the initialization process of the main control board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process of the presentation control part in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the base alerting | reporting process of the production | presentation control part in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an alerting | reporting aspect of base alerting | reporting alerting | reporting. (A) is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where base alerting | reporting is performed after a setting change, (b) is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where base alerting | reporting is performed after RWM clearing. (A) is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where base alerting | reporting is performed after setting confirmation, (b) is a specific example in the case where base alerting | reporting is performed after power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case of becoming an unrecoverable error. It is a figure which shows the modification of base alerting | reporting.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a game machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of a partial perspective view of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 supported rotatably with respect to the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 supported rotatably with respect to the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which a game ball (game medium) as a game value flows is formed.

  In the outer frame 2, the decorative plate 2b is attached to the lower front of the rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front and rear direction, and fixing members (for example, nails, fasteners, etc.) Fixed via).

  The game board attachment frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and supported rotatably around the first hinge mechanism 6 It is done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is pivoted like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, so various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 It becomes possible to do maintenance and the like.

  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board attachment frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is pivoted relative to the game board attachment frame 3 like a door, the front area of the game area 5 a of the game board 5 and the game board attachment frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. The game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

  A voice output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decoration LEDs, and a payout device 95 described later are dispensed on the periphery of the opening 8 of the glass frame 4 based on the establishment of application conditions. The upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of gaming balls such as the gaming balls, and the lower tray 12 for receiving and storing the gaming balls which have flowed into the overflowing ball flow path which will be described later without entering the upper tray 11 A launch operating device 13 is provided which can be operated to launch a ball.

  The audio output device 9 is provided at two places in the upper part of the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs effects such as BGM (background music) and SE (sound effect) to produce sounds (music and voice). It is supposed to be. In addition, a plurality of the frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8 and perform effects by illumination by changing the irradiation direction and light emission color of the light of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame illumination device 10 is provided with a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light up / blink when an opening abnormality of the glass frame 4 or a payout abnormality in which the gaming ball can not be dispensed from the payout device 95 occurs.

  In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction of the launch operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game ball is sent out toward the game board attachment frame 3 one by one by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

  In addition, on the portion near the center of the upper tray 11, the effect button device 16 and the selection button device 18 that function as input devices for performing the determination operation and selection operation according to various effects described later (FIG. 1 or FIG. Reference) is provided side by side.

  The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting an operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 in a normal state and a normal state A button drive motor 17b for changing to a projecting state positioned higher than the above, a button vibration motor 17c (operating portion) for changing the effect button 17 to a normal state and a vibration state vibrating in a predetermined mode; A button light emitting LED 17 d (light emitting unit) is provided to change the effect button 17 between the extinction state and the light emitting state emitting light in a predetermined mode, and the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. .

  The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing an operation such as selection operation, and a cross for detecting operations of the cross key 19 A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 6) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  Further, a lending operation unit 20 capable of performing a lending operation of gaming balls and a return operation of a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided at a portion to the right of the upper tray 11. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to loan the gaming ball. When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

  Between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12, an overflow ball flow passage (not shown) is formed for receiving the game balls which do not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding them to the lower plate 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 6) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect that the gaming ball is full on the lower tray 12, and the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full. While the game is being performed, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 95 described later is stopped.

  The launch operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the launch handle 15 is in contact with the player's hand. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 6) comprising a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is provided 15a (see FIG. 6). When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

  The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launcher 26 (see FIG. 6) for firing the game ball toward the game area 5a, and the game board mounting frame 3 and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in the closed state and an open detection switch 31a (see FIG. 6) for detecting the opening (opening and closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

  The game board attachment portion 25 is formed in a concave shape whose front is open substantially at the center of the upper part of the game board attachment frame 3 and can accommodate the game board 5 from the front. An opening is provided in the back of the recess of the gaming board mounting portion 25 so as to open in the front-rear direction, and various devices provided on the back side of the gaming board 5 through the opening are located behind the gaming machine 1 Come on.

  The launcher 26 is a launch member for launching the game ball, a launch solenoid 28b (see FIG. 6) for driving the launch member, and a launch which is inclined upward from the launch member toward the lower left end of the game board A rail and a stopper for holding the gaming ball at a launch position, which is the lower end of the ramp, are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 6) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member.

  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board attachment portion 25 so that the front end of the cylinder in which the key hole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board installation frame 3 is released and the game board installation frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which game balls can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, there is formed a launch ball guiding path 38 for guiding the gaming ball fired by the launch device 26 to the upstream portion of the gaming area 5a. In the most downstream part of the game area 5a, an out port 39 is formed for guiding the flowed-out game ball to the outside of the game area (the collection portion of the game board attachment frame 3).

  At the approximate center of the game area 5a, there is provided a frame-like decorative frame 40 for restricting the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case, and this decorative frame 40 causes the game area 5a to be fired with a first launch force. It is divided into the left side game area where the played game balls flow down, and the right side game area where the game balls fired with the second launch force stronger than the first drive way flow down, and the left game area and the right game area Are in communication with the lower part of the decorative frame 40.

  On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing the gaming ball flowing down the left gaming area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and on the lower portion of the decorative frame 40, the warp device 41 The stage portion 42 is provided to roll the gaming ball introduced to the lower side of the decoration frame 40 and roll it down.

  Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (entering) gaming balls are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40 There is provided one general winning opening 43 in which the ball can always win (enter). A predetermined number (for example, five) of game balls are detected when the game balls that have won (entered) the general winning opening 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 6). It is paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as a winning ball (granting of game value).

  Below the stage portion 42, there is provided a first starting opening 45 (a starting winning area for a first special symbol) where a game ball can always be paid (entered), and a prize is received at this first starting opening 45 (entered When the game ball which is the ball) is detected with the 1st starting opening detection switch 45a (see Figure 6) (the granting condition is satisfied), the game ball (3 for example) of specified number is paid out device 95 (see Figure 3) Are paid out to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (granting of game value). In addition, a right to perform a special game determination (big hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a special game (here, a big hit game) is granted (to-be-described special view determination information is stored).

  Below the decorative frame 40 and obliquely downward to the right of the first starting opening 45, it is impossible or possible to win a game ball (entering the ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that the win has been won by a hit determination described later) A variable starting portion 46 is provided which can convert the difficult closed state into an open state where winning of the gaming ball is possible or easy.

  The variable start portion 46 is a flow path of the gaming ball by being inclined downward to the left and right direction (left side in FIG. 1), and the movable start portion 46 is movable member 48 movable in the front and rear direction A second starting opening detection switch 47a (FIG. 6) for detecting a second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) which opens upward and a gaming ball which has won (entered) the second starting opening 47. (Refer to) and, by moving the movable member 48 forward (winning restricted position) to convert the second starting opening 47 into the closed state, and moving the movable member 48 rearward (winning permitted position) A second start opening / closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 6) is provided to convert the second start opening 47 into an open state.

  Then, the game ball is prized at the second starting opening 47 which is in the open state during the auxiliary game described later, and this gaming ball is detected by the second starting opening detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6). And a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, two pieces) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as award balls (granting of game value). In addition, a right to make a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (here, a big hit game) is granted (to-be-described special view determination information is stored).

  In the right side game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, a common drawing gate 44 (common drawing start area) through which the game ball can always pass is provided. If the game ball which has passed this common drawing gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, the prize ball is not provided, but the right to perform the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) whether to execute the auxiliary game is Granted (generally determined information to be described later is stored).

  Downstream of the game drawing gate 44, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that the jackpot was won in the special game determination), it is possible or easier to open a game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (enter). A first variable winning portion 49 convertible to the state is provided.

  The first variable winning portion 49 has a flow path for gaming balls by tilting downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing) in the upper surface, and the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 movable in the front-rear direction; A first big prize for detecting a first big prize mouth 50 (prize area) which opens upward directly below the first big prize mouth opening / closing member 51 and a game ball which has won (entered) a first big prize mouth The first big winning opening 50 is converted to the closed state by moving the mouth detection switch 50a and the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position), and the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 A first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 6) is provided for converting the first large winning opening 50 into the open state by moving the second rear (the winning acceptance position).

  Then, when the first large winning opening opening and closing member 51 is moved from the restricted winning position to the possible winning position during the big hit game, the first large winning opening 50 is converted to the open state, and the upper surface of the first large winning opening opening and closing member 51 The game ball that has flowed out and the game ball that has reached the first large winning opening 50 win the first large winning opening 50. Then, when the gaming ball that has won the first big winning opening 50 is detected by the first big winning opening detection switch 50a (the awarding condition is satisfied), the gaming balls of a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 15 pieces) are paid out It is paid out from the device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as a winning ball (granting a game value).

  Downstream of the first variable winning portion 49, it is possible or easier to achieve a prize from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (that a jackpot was won in a special game determination) A second variable winning portion 52 that can be converted to the open state is provided.

  The second variable winning portion 52 has a second large winning opening opening / closing member 54 which becomes a flow path of the gaming ball by tilting downward in the upper surface in the left-right direction (right side in the figure), The second big prize to detect the second big prize port 53 (prize area) which opens upwards directly under the second big prize port opening and closing member 54 and the game ball which has won (entered) the second big prize port The second large winning opening 53 is converted to a closed state by moving the mouth detection switch 53a and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 54 forward (winning restriction position), and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 54 A second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b (see FIG. 6) is provided for converting the second large winning opening 53 into the open state by moving the second rear (the winning allowed position).

  Then, when the second large winning opening opening and closing member 54 is moved from the restricted prize position to the winning allowable position during the big hit game, the second large winning opening 53 is converted to the open state, and the upper surface of the second large winning opening opening and closing member 54 The game ball which has flowed down and the game ball which has reached the second large winning opening 53 win the second large winning opening 53. Then, when the game ball that has won a prize in the second big winning opening 53 is detected by the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 15) of gaming balls are paid out 95 (see FIG. 3) Is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball.

  Then, the game balls launched to the left side game area flow down along the outer edge of the decoration frame 40 as they are or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage unit 42 and provided below the decoration frame 40 One of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45 is to be won, or flows into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43 provided in the right gaming area, the regular drawing gate 44, the first variable winning portion 49 (first large winning opening 50), and the second variable winning portion 52 (second large winning opening 53) It does not go through.

  In addition, the game ball which is fired to the right side game territory, general winning a prize opening 43, common gate gate 44, variable starting section 46 (the 2nd starting opening 47), 1st variable winning a prize section 49 (the 1st big winning a prize opening 50), Either the second variable winning portion 52 (second large winning opening 53) will be winning or will flow into the out port 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left side game area will not win.

  On the back side of the game board 5 are the game balls that have won in the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50 and the second large winning opening 53, and the out opening 39. An out ball passage is provided for receiving and collecting out balls formed of inflowing game balls, and an out ball detection switch 57a (see FIG. 6) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out ball passage. The game ball which has flowed down the out ball flow path and is detected by the out ball detection switch 57a is discharged from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside (island facility) of the game machine 1.

  Outside the game area 5a, a symbol display device comprising a first special symbol indicator 60, a second special symbol indicator 61 and a normal symbol indicator 62, a first special symbol hold indicator 63, a second special symbol hold A hold display comprising a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 for displaying the number of rounds when a big hit game (special game) described later is executed, and a big hit game described later (special game (special game) A right-handed indicator 67 is provided to prompt firing of the gaming ball toward the right gaming area during the middle or high probability gaming state.

  The first special symbol display 60 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the special game determination (big win determination of the first special symbol) performed based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 45 (entering the ball). It is a variable display, and the second special symbol display 61 displays the result of the special game determination (big hit determination of the second special symbol) performed based on the winning (entering) of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 47 It is a variable indicator for (informing), and the normal symbol display 62 is the result of the auxiliary game determination (the normal symbol hit determination) performed based on the passage (entering the ball) of the gaming ball to the spread map gate 44. It is a variable display for displaying (notifying).

  With special game determination, when the game ball wins (enters) in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47 Special drawing determination information (Rockup determination random number value, special symbol determination random number value, for reach determination It corresponds to acquiring a random number value, a random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc., and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

  Then, when the special game determination is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 45, the first special symbol display 60 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner, and indicates the determination result after a predetermined time has elapsed. The stop display of the first special symbol is performed. In addition, when the special game decision is done on the basis of winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 47, 2nd special symbol fluctuation indicatory is done with 2nd special symbol indicator 61, shows the decision result after the specified time elapses The stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

  The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are respectively constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display blink in a predetermined interval or order in the variable display of each special symbol. And when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights in a mode (big hit mode, small hit mode, lost mode) indicating the result of the special game determination.

  In the present embodiment, "big hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to perform a big hit game (special game) in the special game determination. The “big hit game” is a round game in which the big winning opening (first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of times across the interval ( For example, it refers to a gaming state that is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a prize ball, which is performed twice, 16 times, etc.).

  In addition, although the maximum opening frequency and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening (the first large winning opening 50, the second large winning opening 53) in each round game are determined in advance, before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached Even if a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, nine) are won (entered) in the special winning opening, one round game ends. In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage to the player.

  Also, "small hit" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute a small hit game (special game) in the special game determination. The "small hit game" is that a player who plays a game in which the large winning opening (the second large winning opening 53) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a more disadvantageous manner than the big hit game is easy to win a prize ball It refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in the small hitting game is predetermined, but even before it reaches the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, nine pieces) are won in the big winning opening ) Then the small hit game ends. In addition, unlike the jackpot game, the gaming state does not change based on the execution of the small hit game.

  The auxiliary game determination is based on the passage (entering) of the game ball to the common gate 44 (generally determined random number for hitting determination, random value for normal symbol determination, random value for determining common variation pattern etc.) And corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired common drawing determination information. In addition, when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is performed by the normal symbol display 62, and the stop display of the normal symbol indicating (notifying) the determination result is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The normal symbol display 62 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink in a predetermined interval or order in the variable display of the normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lighted in a mode (hit mode or lost mode) indicating the result of the auxiliary game determination.

  In the present embodiment, the term "cash" refers to a state in which it is determined to execute an auxiliary game (cash game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" refers to a gaming state in which the second start port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the maximum opening frequency and maximum opening time of the 2nd starting opening 47 in auxiliary game (per game) are decided beforehand, even before reaching the maximum opening frequency and the maximum opening time, it is in the 2nd starting opening 47 When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are winning (entering), the auxiliary game (hit game) is ended. That is, the "assist game" is in a game state in which the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily established. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (hit games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

  The first special symbol hold display 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the number of special view determination information (first special view hold) stored when the gaming ball is won (entered) in the first starting opening 45 It is for displaying the number of 1st special figure reservations which is and it lights or blinks in the mode which shows the number of 1st special figure reservations. In addition, although the 1st special figure reservation is stored up to four, it may be less or more than four.

  The second special symbol hold display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the number of special view determination information (second special view hold) stored when the game ball is won (entered) in the second starting opening 47 It is for displaying the 2nd special figure reservation number which is and it lights or blinks in the mode which shows the number of 2nd special figure reservations. Although up to four second special view reservations are stored, they may be less or more than four, or even if the second special view reservations are not stored. Good.

  The normal symbol holding display 65 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and the number of common drawing holdings, which is the number of common drawing determination information (general drawing holding) stored when the gaming ball has won (passed) the common drawing gate 44 To display, and lights or blinks in a mode indicating the number of general drawing reservations. In addition, although the common drawing suspension is stored up to four, the number may be smaller or larger than four, or the common drawing suspension may not be stored.

  The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by 7-segment LEDs. For example, when winning a big hit lottery of special symbols, "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and it is during the variable display. It is preferable to repeat turning off and "-".

  At the back of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) comprising a liquid crystal display is provided, which is a lower part of the effect space 40a and is a first image display In front of the device 70, a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) comprising a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are formed smaller than the first image display device 70 is provided, and in the upper part of the rendering space 40a. A movable effect device 73 for performing operation effects is provided, and a fluctuation notification LED 59 for notifying an execution state of fluctuation display of a special symbol is provided on the right portion of the effect space 40a.

  In the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various effects are displayed according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting effect performed during non-execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the change effect accompanied with the variable display of the effect pattern 70a performed during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, and the execution of the big hit game There is a jackpot effect etc. to be performed.

  In addition, the second image display device 71 can perform a move effect by moving by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) configured by a solenoid, a motor, and the like while the change effect is being performed by the first image display device 70. It has become.

  Specifically, the standby position (first position) located closer (downward) to the end of the first image display device 70 and the effect position (second) located closer to the center of the first image display device 70 (upper) The movement effect is performed by moving (raising and lowering) in the vertical direction between the position (a) and (b). Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, or the movement effect may be performed by the operation of the effect button 17.

  In the display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a variable display area for displaying three rendering symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and execution of variation effects The mode display area etc. which show production mode which concerns on are formed.

  In addition, the effect pattern 70a is, for example, configured by a symbol indicating a number from "1" to "8", and the variation display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 In response to the start of the variable display is started, and in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol, the stop display is performed. In addition, you may use the symbol which shows alphabets from "A" to "F" as the production | presentation pattern 70a.

  In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is configured to stop for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (loss mode, big hit mode) indicating the result of the special game determination (big hit determination). The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect pattern 70a such as "777", and the lost mode is the other mode.

  In addition, although the aspect of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is scrolling in the up and down direction, it may be scrolling in the left and right direction, or even switching or rotation (rotation) on the spot etc. Good.

  In addition, during the variable display of the design pattern 70a (the variable display), according to the result of the special game determination, various effect images such as a background image or a character, a movie, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display. By being displayed on the device 71, the expectation of the player for the jackpot game (special game) to be executed is enhanced.

  A first hold icon display area 70C (first hold area) for displaying the first hold icon (the first hold display) of the number corresponding to the first special view hold number (U1) on the first image display device 70 ), The second hold icon display area 70D (second hold area) for displaying the second hold icon (second hold display) of the number corresponding to the second special view hold number (U2), and the special view hold The icon display area 70E (digestion reserve area) or the like for displaying the icon (digestion reserve display) indicating that the variation effect performed by subtracting the number is being executed is formed.

  The first reserved icon display area 70C is a first display 70C1 (first area), a second display 70C2 (second area), a third display 70C3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70E. , And a fourth display unit 70C4 (fourth area), and the first display unit 70C1 to the fourth display unit 70C4 have the first hold of the number corresponding to the first special view reservation number (U1). An icon is displayed.

  Specifically, the first display 70C1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display 70C2 displays a second The first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the first display, and the third display unit 70C3 displays the first variable icon of the first special symbol executed thirdly. The first hold icon indicating the hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70C4 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed fourthly.

  The second reserved icon display area 70D is a first display 70D1 (first area), a second display 70D2 (second area), a third display 70D3 (third area), a fourth display 70D4 (from the left). The first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 display the second hold icons corresponding in number to the second special view hold number (U2).

  Specifically, the first display 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first executed, and the second display 70D2 displays the second hold icon. The second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the second display, and the third display unit 70D3 is the second one in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed thirdly The second hold icon indicating the hold storage is displayed, and the second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed fourthly is displayed on the fourth display 70D4.

  The icon display area 70E is formed immediately above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first reserved icon display area 70C and the second reserved icon display area 70D, and rides or floats on the pedestal image. The corresponding icon is displayed.

  Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70C is directed toward the icon display area 70E one by one. It moves (shifts), and the first hold icon displayed on the first display 70C1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70E to become the icon, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (deletes) at the end of.

  Also, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a), the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D moves one by one toward the icon display area 70E (shift ), And the second hold icon displayed on the first display 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70E to become the icon, and at the end of the variation display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon disappears (deletes). In addition, the said icon may be made to disappear in the middle of the fluctuation display of special symbol (effect pattern 70a).

  In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 performs the variation display of the rendering symbol 70a, but the second image display device 71 may perform the variation display of the rendering symbol, or the first image display device 70 The variable display of the effect pattern 70 a may be performed on both the image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

  The movable effect device 73 includes the movable first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b, and the first movable member 73a or the movable member 73a is displayed during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a executed by the first image display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to execute an operation effect. Moreover, the board illumination device 74 having a plurality of decoration LEDs is provided on the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b, and it is possible to emit light in a predetermined manner during execution of operation effects .

  Specifically, the first movable member 73 a is located at a standby position (first position) located closer to the end of the first image display device 70 (upper position) and closer to the center of the first image display device 70 (lower position) It moves (rises and descends) to and from the effect position (second position) located. The second movable member 73b is configured to move between a standby position (first position) covering a portion of the front of the first movable member 73a and a production position for retreating from the front of the first movable member 73a. .

  The variation notification LED 59 is configured of a full color LED, and is provided with a first variation notification LED 59a corresponding to the first special symbol and a second variation notification LED 59b corresponding to the second special symbol. The first variation notification LED 59a starts color change (variation display of the first special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, and color corresponding to the stop of the variation display of the first special symbol By stopping the change of (the first special symbol fluctuation display), it is informed whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second variation notification LED 59b starts color change (variation display of the second special symbol) corresponding to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and color corresponding to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol By stopping the change of (the second special symbol fluctuation display), it is reported whether or not the second special symbol is variably displayed.

  In addition, while notifying the result of the fluctuation display (special game judgment) of the first special symbol by the combination of the effect pattern 70a and the first special symbol displayed in the stop, the combination of the effect pattern 70a displayed the stop and the second special symbol The result of the variable display (special game range) of the second special symbol may be notified by the. In addition, while notifying the result of the fluctuation display (special game judgment) of the first special symbol only by the first special symbol stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol only by the second special symbol stopped and displayed (special game judgment ) May be notified.

  In addition, instead of displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol by the first variation notification LED 59a or the second variation notification LED 59b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be displayed on the first image display 70 or the second image symbol 70 The variable display may be performed by the two-image display device 71.

  On the back side of the game board installation frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out gaming balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), games supplied from island facilities etc. According to the payout control command from the main control device 110A, which stores the balls and supplies the balls to the payout device 95, and the main control substrate 110 that incorporates the main control substrate 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game. Payout control device 120A for controlling the payout device 95 and the effect control device 130A for the effect control substrate 130 for controlling the effect according to the effect control command from the main control substrate 110 Power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply substrate 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, gaming information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) Such game information output terminal board 90 for outputting is provided a.

  In addition, a cover member 23 of an open / close door type is provided in which the left and right sides are opened and closed in the left and right direction with the rotation axis set on one side to cover the upper part of the main control device and the whole of the effect control device from behind. In the effect control device 130A, the volume of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, the image display device, and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74) A changeover switch 22 is provided to switch the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount.

(Configuration of main controller)
Next, the configuration of the main control device 110A for controlling the progress of the game will be described using FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of main controller 110A.

  Main controller 110A includes a main control substrate 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin substrate case for accommodating main control substrate 110 therein, and a sealing seal for restricting the opening of the substrate case. And a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the sealing seal 104.

  The main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling a game and the memory content of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m on the surface side of the main control board 110 are at the stage of clearing or the degree of advantage of the game RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, and a signal for changing the set value to a changeable state or a setable state by an operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a for inputting the information, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values for enabling understanding of the actual performance of the gaming machine, and the like are mounted.

  The information display 113 is for displaying set values and performance information (normal base value described later) described later, and is configured by four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP. . Then, an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of performance information is configured on the 7-segment displays 113a and 113b, and the 7-segment displays 113c and 113d indicate numerical values of setting values and performance information. A numerical segment is configured to display numerical information.

  The substrate case has a concave lower case member 101 whose portion facing the back surface side of the main control substrate 110 is open, and a concave upper case member 102 whose portion facing the front surface side of the main control substrate 110 is open. The lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 are closed to form an accommodation space for accommodating the main control board 110.

  At the end of the substrate case, a sealing portion for sealing the substrate case in a state in which the lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 are closed in a state in which the main control substrate 110 is accommodated, and the lower case member 101 A sticking portion for sticking the sealing seal 104 across the upper case member 102 is provided.

  The sealing portion is composed of a lower fixing portion 101 a provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper fixing portion 102 a provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower fixing portion 101 a. Then, the substrate case is sealed by screwing a one-way screw whose rotation in the removal direction is restricted from the upper fixed portion 102a to the lower fixed portion 101a.

  The sticking portion is configured of a lower sticking portion 101b provided in the lower case member 101, and an upper sticking portion 102b provided in the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower sticking portion 101b. And a board | substrate case will be sealed by sticking the sealing seal 104 across the lower sticking part 101b and the upper sticking part 102b.

  The seal cover member 105 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber in which one side is open. Then, the sealing seal 104 is protected by attaching it to the substrate case so as to include the sticking portion in a state in which the sealing seal 104 is stuck.

  On the upper surface of the upper case member 102, the model name seal 106 on which the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is printed, and the control number seal 107 on which the control number of the main control board 110 is printed It is stuck in the state. Further, at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, an operation member 108 for pressing (turning on) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted. When the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

  Further, at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a, an insertion portion 112 for inserting the setting key into the key hole of the setting key switch 112a is formed. The insertion portion 112 has an opening for exposing the key hole of the setting key switch 112 a to the outside, and a cylindrical portion extended rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112 a doing. Then, insert the setting key into the key hole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening, and turn it to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a will turn ON and the setting key will not come out of the key hole. When the initial position is returned to, the setting key switch 112a is turned off, and the setting key is released from the keyhole.

(Positional relationship of various elements)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the positional relationship of various elements constituting the main control device 110A will be described. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the positional relationship of various elements constituting the main control device 110A.

  The model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107 are arranged on the upper side of the step portion formed in the lower portion of the upper case member 102 in the left and right direction and in the vicinity of the center of the upper case member 102 in the lateral direction. As it is affixed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check the print content.

  The main control unit 110m, which is a one-chip microcomputer, is located at the upper center of the main control board 110 and shifted upward so as not to overlap with the model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107 It is mounted with the print side printed with the product name etc. facing upward. Therefore, the main control unit 110m can easily confirm the printing surface from the upper side of the substrate case without being restricted (shielded) by the model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107.

  The information display 113 is mounted on the right side of the upper side of the main control board 110 at a position shifted rightward and upward so as not to overlap with the model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107 in the horizontal direction. It is done. Therefore, the information display 113 is not restricted (shielded) in visual recognition by the model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107, and the display contents can be easily confirmed.

  In the sealing seal 104, the portion attached to the upper surface (surface) of the attaching portion formed by the upper attaching portion 102b is closer to the main control board 110 than the type name seal 106 and the management number seal 107 (the upper surface of the upper case member 102 and And the portion attached to the lower surface (bottom surface) of the attaching portion formed by the lower attaching portion 101b is located on the lower side (back side) than the information display device 113. doing.

  A performance display unit obtained by unitizing a circuit section including four 7-segment displays and a substrate as the information display 113 may be mounted on the main control board. Even in such a case, it is preferable to arrange them so as not to overlap back and forth so that the visual recognition is not restricted (shielded) by the model name seal 106 and the control number seal 107.

  Also, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control substrate 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on a dedicated substrate It may be mounted and board-to-board connection may be made to the main control board 110 so as to be contained in the board case of the main control board 110.

  In addition, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, and provided on the power supply board 160 if the position can not be operated by the player. It may be provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, it is preferable that the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a be input to the main control unit 110m.

  Also, instead of a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value being inputted by the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch may be provided to input the signal of In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or the power supply board as a position where the player can not operate. Alternatively, it may be provided on the back side of the game board attachment frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

  Also, instead of displaying both the performance information and the setting value on the information display 113, another display is executed on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, The performance information may be displayed on one of the displays, and the set value may be displayed on one of the other displays.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described using the block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

  As a control configuration of the present embodiment, a main control board 110 that controls the progress of the game (basic operation) and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110 A power supply substrate for supplying power to the effect control substrate 130 which controls effects concerning the game based on the substrate 120 and the reception of the effect control command from the main control substrate 110, and the main control substrate 110, the payout control substrate 120 and the effect control substrate 130 It has 160.

  Communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to transmit and receive commands in both directions, and communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is controlled from the main control board 110 for effect control The command can be transmitted in one direction only to the substrate 130.

  The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer including a main CPU 110a performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b storing gaming control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c serving as a work area at the time of arithmetic processing, and input / output ports etc. It is equipped with 110m.

  The input / output port of the main control unit 110m includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, a first large size The winning opening detection switch 50a, the first large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 51b, the second large winning opening detection switch 53a, the second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 54b, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, the out ball detection switch 57a, the second 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator 63, second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information indicator 13, dispensing the control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is connected.

  The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. Thereby, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switch, detection sensor, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoid, display, etc.), transmission / reception of various control commands Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside (such as a hall computer) of the gaming machine through the game information output terminal board 90, etc. are performed.

  The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of the gaming balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launching device 26 to control the firing of the gaming balls.

  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program and the like, a payout RAM 121c that is a work area at the time of arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

  In the input / output port of the payout control unit 121, the opening detection switch 31a, the fullness detection switch 32a, the payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 95, and the gaming balls from the payout device 95 A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that the game balls are stored in the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage unit 96 is connected.

  The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control substrate 110, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control substrate 110, etc. Do.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input / output port, and the like (not shown).
The ball feed solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the launch volume 15b, the launch solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input / output port of the launch control unit 122.

  The launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 based on a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, and allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized, and launches the game. When it is detected from the detection signal from the volume 15b that the turning angle of the firing handle 15 has changed, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven, and the firing solenoid is made to have a firing intensity corresponding to the turning angle of the firing handle 15. The 28b is driven to fire the game ball (99.9 pcs / min).

  The effect control board 130 controls the progress of the effect in an integrated manner based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control board 110, and displays the image based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light emitting members (such as LEDs) and various drive sources (such as motors) based on reception of rendering control commands from the rendering control unit 130m. Is equipped.

  The effect control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that is a work area at the time of arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

  The effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input / output port of the effect control unit 130m.

  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs operation processing regarding effects while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, control processing for determining the rendering aspect of the fluctuation rendering, control processing for transmitting the rendering control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and detection signals from various input devices (detection switch etc.) Control processing and control processing for controlling various output devices (such as lighting devices and motors).

  The display control unit 140 controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image in response to a command from the effect control unit 130 m, and the sound output device 9 performs a predetermined sound. And control the output of sounds.

  The display control unit 140 generally controls the image display and the sound output based on the reception of the effect control command from the effect control unit 130m, and the display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141. The image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception, the CGROM 146 storing image data and the like, and voice output based on the reception of voice control commands from the general control unit 141 A voice control unit 148 for controlling the device 9 and a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored are provided.

  The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a for performing arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b for storing an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c serving as a work area at the time of arithmetic processing, and an input to which an image control unit 145 and a voice control unit 148 are connected. It has an output port.

  The overall CPU 141a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding effects while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) instructing a rendering image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, an audio output device A control process or the like is performed to generate a voice control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and to transmit it to the voice control unit 148.

  The lamp control unit 150 performs a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that becomes a work area at the time of arithmetic processing, a frame lighting device 10, a button drive motor 17b, and a button vibration motor 17 c, a button light emitting LED 17 d, and an input / output port.

  The frame lighting device 10, the button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button light emitting LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, and the panel lighting device 74 are connected to the input / output port of the lamp control unit 150.

  The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing regarding effects while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the frame illumination device 10, the button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button light emitting LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, and the panel illumination device 74 is performed.

  The power supply substrate 160 generates a main power supply (operation power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and the main power supply is used as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Supply to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components) (corresponding to the power supply means). The power supply substrate 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power failure has occurred), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control substrate 110 based on the power supply voltage drop (a power failure occurrence). It is provided with a disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 at the time of power interruption (power failure).

  In addition, the power supply substrate 160 is switched between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control substrate 110, payout control substrate 120, effect control substrate 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which it is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a store clerk in the game shop, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Even when the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 and the effect control unit 130m is maintained.

  The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than a predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

  The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor for storing electricity when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is controlled by the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 and effect control It supplies to sub RAM130c of section 130m. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is shut down (power failure), and the game control state is restored to the state before the power shut down (power failure) after recovery from the power shut down (power failure). It can be restored.

  Although the backup control power is not supplied to the payout control board 120, the backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c are maintained even when the power is shut down (power failure). .

  In addition, although backup power is supplied to the effect control unit 130m, the backup control power is supplied to the effect control unit 130m when there is no need to hold the storage content of the sub RAM 130c at the time of power loss (power failure). It may not be supplied.

(Description of gaming state)
Next, the gaming state when the game proceeds will be described. In the present embodiment, the state related to the special game determination (big hit determination) has “low probability gaming state” and “high probability gaming state”, and “non-time-short game playing as the state related to the movable member 48 of the second starting opening 47 It has "state" and "time saving game state". Therefore, in the present embodiment,
(1) "Low probability non time saving gaming state" which is low probability gaming state and non time saving gaming state,
(2) "Low probability time short game state" which is low probability game state and time saving game state,
(3) A high probability gaming state and a short time gaming state are provided.

  The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to "low probability non-short game state", and this gaming state is referred to as "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot game is also set to the "low probability non-short game state", but it will be a gaming state different from the normal gaming state.

  Here, the “low probability gaming state” is, for example, the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, in the case where the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) is “1”, the first starting opening 45 or the second starting In the special game determination (big hit determination) performed on the condition that the game ball has entered the mouth 47, it means a gaming state in which the winning probability of the big hit is set as low as about 1/300.

  On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" means that the jackpot probability of the big hit is set to be as high as about 1/60 when the set value is "1", thereby making it possible for the player to be compared with the low probability gaming state. Game state that is advantageous to The transition from the low probability gaming state to the high probability gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

  Also, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the winning probability of winning is set as low as 1/16 in the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) that is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the regular drawing gate 44. It means a gaming state in which the average time of the variable display of the symbol is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting opening 47 in the case of winning is set to 0.2 seconds.

  On the other hand, with "time saving gaming state", winning probability of winning is set high as 15/16, average time of fluctuation indication of normal design is set to approximately 3 seconds, and the case of winning the winning 2 The opening time of the starting opening 47 is set to 5 seconds, which means a gaming state advantageous to the player whose consumption of gaming balls is suppressed as compared with the non-time-saving gaming state. The transition from the non-time-saving gaming state to the time-saving gaming state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

  In addition, the "time saving gaming state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47 and the winning probability of the winning lottery become more advantageous than the "non-time saving gaming state". Alternatively, only one of the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47 and the winning probability of the winning lottery may be set to be advantageous.

  Also, although the winning probability of winning in the auxiliary game determination in the non-time saving gaming state is the same without changing by the setting value, it is different depending on the setting value so that the winning probability becomes more advantageous as the setting value increases. It is also good. Also, the winning probability of winning in the auxiliary game determination in the time saving game state is also the same without changing by the setting value, but it is different depending on the setting value so as to become an advantageous winning probability as the setting value increases. It is also good.

(Memory map of main control unit)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area including the main ROM 110b and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m.

  The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the main RAM 110c.

  The memory area of the main ROM 110b is a gaming ROM area (8000H to 9FFFH) in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area (A000H) in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored. ~ A52EH), an unused area (A52FH to A6FFH) of 16 bytes or more where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and a ROM comment area (A700H ~) where data such as program title and version are stored A77FH), vector table area (A780H to A7A7H) in which the start address of timer interrupt processing described later is set, and HW parameter area (A7A8H to A7F) in which parameters such as start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set A7FFFH) are arranged in order.

  The gaming ROM area is a gaming program area (8000H to 8BDCH) in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a first unused area (8BDDH to 8FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. And gaming data areas (9000H to 9776H) in which data relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a second unused area (9977H to 9FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. It is arranged.

  The information ROM area is an information program area (A000H to A437H) in which a program relating to performance indication of a gaming machine is stored, and an unused area (A438H to A47FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. In addition, information data areas (A480H to A52EH) for storing data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are arranged in order.

  The memory area of the main RAM 110c is a game RWM area (0000H to 018FH) used as a work (work area) when executing a game program, and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program. (0190H to 01FFH) are arranged in order.

  The RWM area for gaming includes a gaming work area (0000H to 0128H) that the gaming program uses as a work, and a first unused area (0129H to 0171H) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. A game stack area (0172H to 017FH) for temporarily saving data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area (0180H to 018FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ) Are arranged in order.

  In the game work area, a setting value area for storing a setting value, a determination information area for storing determination information (checksum to be described later) for determining an abnormality in the RWM area, and the change according to the progress of the game Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

  The information RWM area includes an information work area (0190H to 01E8H) used by the information program as a work, an unused area (01E9H to 01EAH) where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the information program Information stack areas (01EBH to 01FFH) for temporarily saving data being processed are sequentially arranged.

  In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in order.

(Dump list of RWM area)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a dump list when the contents of the memory area of the main control unit 110m are output to a printer or a display. In FIG. 8, a plurality of areas surrounded by squares are unused areas in which “0” is stored.

  In the RWM area for gaming, an unused area in which "0" is stored between the gaming work area (0000H to 0128H) and the gaming stack area (0172H to 017FH) is set over 73 bytes or more . Therefore, a boundary line separating the gaming work area and the gaming stack area is formed by the unused area, and the gaming work area and the gaming stack area can be easily made in the debugging operation and inspection of the gaming machine 1 It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

  In the information RWM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored between the information work area (0190H to 01E8H) and the information stack area (01EBH to 01FFH) is set over 2 bytes. Therefore, a boundary separating the information work area and the information stack area is formed by the unused area, and the information work area and the information stack area are easily identified in the debugging operation and inspection of the gaming machine 1 It becomes possible to (recognize).

  In addition, the unused area where “0” is stored after the gaming stack area (0172H to 017FH) is set over 16 bytes from 0180H which is a multiple of 16 and after this unused area, the information work area ( 0190H to 01E8H) are set from 0190H, which is a multiple of sixteen. Therefore, a boundary line separating the gaming RWM area and the information RWM area is formed by the unused area, and the gaming RWM area and the information RWM area can be easily made in the debugging operation and inspection of the gaming machine 1 It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

  In the gaming ROM area, an unused area in which “0” is stored between the gaming program areas (8000H to 8BDCH) and the gaming data areas (9000H to 9776H) is set over 1059 bytes. Therefore, a boundary line separating the gaming program area and the gaming data area is formed by the unused area, and the gaming program area and the gaming data area can be easily made in the debugging operation and inspection of the gaming machine 1 It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

  In the information ROM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored between the information program area (A000H to A437H) and the information data area (A480H to A52EH) is set over 72 bytes. Therefore, a boundary separating the information program area and the information data area is formed by the unused area, and the information program area and the information data area are easily identified in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1 It becomes possible to (recognize).

  In addition, an unused area in which "0" is stored after the game data area (9000H to 9776H) is set over 1673 bytes, and the information program area is a multiple of 16 after A000H after this unused area It is set. Therefore, a boundary line separating the gaming ROM area and the information ROM area is formed by the unused area, and the gaming ROM area and the information ROM area can be easily made in the debugging operation and inspection of the gaming machine 1 It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

  In the gaming ROM area and the information ROM area, an unused area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the program area and the data area, but the unused area may be 16 bytes or less, or the program area It is not necessary to provide an unused area between the data area and the data area.

  Also, although an unused area is provided at the end of the gaming ROM area, this unused area is not provided in the gaming ROM area, but at the beginning of the information ROM area (before the information program area). An unused area may be provided, or between the gaming ROM area and the information ROM area so as not to belong to the gaming ROM area and the information ROM area (between the gaming data area and the information program area) May provide an unused area.

  Moreover, in the RWM area for gaming and the RWM area for information, an unused area of a predetermined byte is provided between the work area and the stack area, but this unused area may be 16 bytes or more, or 16 bytes. Alternatively, an unused area may not be provided between the data area and the stack area.

  In addition, an unused area is provided at the end of the gaming RWM area, but this unused area is not provided in the gaming RWM area, but at the beginning of the information RWM area (before the information work area). An unused area may be provided, or between the gaming RWM area and the information RWM area so as not to belong to the gaming RWM area and the information RWM area (between the gaming stack area and the information work area) May provide an unused area.

(Relationship between game area and information area)
9 shows a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program, and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for processing based on an information program. And the relationship between

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when performing processing based on the game program, the main CPU 110a basically refers to the game data area and uses the game RWM area as a work while playing It refers to and updates the contents of the RWM area. In addition, when processing based on the information program, basically, the information data area is referred to, and the information RWM area is used as a work while the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated. ing.

  However, in the processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area can not be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the gaming RWM area can not be updated, but can be referred to.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, when performing processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area in processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called to perform information processing. The processing based on the program is executed, and immediately after the processing based on the information program is finished and returned to the gaming program, the flag register is restored from the gaming RWM area.

  In addition, immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the gaming stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all registers used in the game program are the information RWM area. Then, immediately before the end of the information program, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

  By doing this, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when the information program is returned to the game program. There is no longer.

  Next, details of the various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Jumping judgment table)
FIG. 10 (a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol to be referred to in the special game determination (big hit determination) performed based on the game ball winning (entering) on the first starting opening 45, as shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol to be referred to in the special game determination (big hit determination) performed based on the winning (entering) of the game ball to the second starting opening 47.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, the current setting value, the probability gaming state when making a jackpot determination, the jackpot determination random number value, and the determination of a jackpot determination The results (big hit, small hit, lost) are associated with each other, and an approximate winning probability in the case of "big hit" or "small hit" is described in the rightmost column as a reference.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, the current setting value, the probability gaming state when jackpot judgment is performed, the jackpot judgment random number value, and the jackpot judgment The determination results (big hit, lost) are associated with each other, and an approximate probability in the case of "big hit" or "small hit" is described in the rightmost column as a reference.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (b), the current setting value, the current probability game Based on the state and the jackpot determination random number value, it is determined which of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss".

  For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10A, when the set value is “1” and the low probability gaming state, 200 “100” to “299” When the jackpot determination random number value is determined to be "big hit" and the high probability gaming state is established, 1000 jackpot determination random number values of "100" to "1099" are determined to be "big hit". In addition, regardless of whether it is the low probability gaming state or the high probability gaming state, 200 jackpot determination random number values “2000” to “2199” are determined to be “small hits”. Therefore, the jackpot determination random number value other than that determined to be a jackpot or a small winning will be determined to be "loss".

  As a feature of the jackpot determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the small hitting probability does not change but is constant. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change extremely depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  It should be noted that the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the high probability gaming state is five times the probability of being determined to be a big hitting in the low probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value), but it is determined to be a big hit The probability of being performed is not limited to five times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as three times or eight times as long as the value is ten times or less.

  In addition, small hits are not set in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, but small hits may be set to have the same probability as the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, The small hit may be set to have a probability different from that of the first special symbol jackpot determination table.

  In addition, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of winning), but conversely, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the probability of large hit). You may

  In addition, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same in all the setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values ( In 1 and 2, 1 to 3 etc.), the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 11 (a) is a special symbol determination table for the big hit that is referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a big hit, and FIG. 11 (b) is a special when it is determined to be a loss It is a special symbol determination table for a loss that is referred to at the time of determination of the stop symbol of the symbol, and FIG. 11 (c) is for a small hit that is referred to at the determination of the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a small hit. It is a special symbol determination table.

  As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C, in the special symbol determination table, the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol, the random value for the special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the determination The stop special figure data indicating the result is associated with the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination.

  The special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols for executing the first jackpot game in which 16 round games are executed, and the special symbols "02" and "05" are 16 rounds It is a jackpot special symbol for executing a second jackpot game in which a game is executed, and "03" is a jackpot special symbol for executing a third jackpot game in which two round games are executed. Also, the special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the big hit game is not executed. In addition, the special symbol “20” is a small hit special symbol for which a small hit game is executed.

  In addition, although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is also good.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 11 (a) to (c), and based on the special symbol type for determining the stop symbol and the special symbol determination random number value The type, the stop special figure data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the type of big hit special symbol, the type of lost special symbol, and the type of small hit special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes possible for the player to play with peace of mind, without becoming too complicated to be entertaining. Note that at least one of the jackpot special symbol and the small hit special symbol may be one type.

  As a second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols, the selection ratio of various lost symbols, the selection ratio of various small symbols is constant without changing depending on the set value Can be mentioned. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change extremely depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 12 is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time short gaming state to be referred to at the time of determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time minor gaming state, and FIG. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for short time game state to be referred to at the time.

  As shown in FIG.12 and FIG.13, in each special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table, the classification result of the special symbol which does fluctuation indication, the decision result of the large hitting decision and the decision result of the special symbol (stop special figure data), A random number for reach determination, the number of first special view reservations (U1) or the number of second special view reservations (U2), a random number for special view variation pattern determination, a special view variation pattern as a determination result, and a special symbol And the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command showing the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

  Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify at least the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the variation time of the special symbol. Also, when the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the random number value for reach judgment is referred to, but in the case of a jackpot, a reach is generated except in a special case, so that the random number value for reach judgment is not referred It is done.

  In the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, when the determination result of the big hit determination is a loss, if the number of special chart reservations (the number of first special view reservations, the number of second special views reservation) increases. The variation pattern is determined so that the variation time of the special symbol becomes short.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special view fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 and determines the determination result of the big hit determination, the special symbol determination result (stop special view data), the reach determination random number value, the first special view reserve Determine the special figure fluctuation pattern, the special symbol fluctuation time and the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command based on the number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2) and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number value, and select the special figure The variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the content (effect mode) of the change effect is determined based on the special figure change pattern (change pattern designation command), so FIGS. In the rightmost column of each of the special drawing pattern determination tables shown in, there are described contents of effects that can be executed by the fluctuation effect as a reference.

  As effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, “normal fluctuation”, “shortened fluctuation”, “long fluctuation”, and “ultra-shortened fluctuation” mean that three effect patterns 70 a are separated at high speed. Fluctuation means stopping without reaching the reach, and normal fluctuation ends in shorter fluctuation time than long fluctuation, and shortening fluctuation ends in shorter fluctuation time than normal fluctuation, The ultrashortened variation ends in a shorter variation time than the shortened variation.

  In addition, “reach” is expected to the player that a jackpot game will be executed such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a notifying the big hit is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a are changed. It means the fluctuation mode that For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a notifying a big hit (large hit result aspect), the same effect pattern 70a is "7" in the left area and the right area It temporarily stops at and says the aspect which the remaining production | presentation pattern 70a is performing the fluctuation | variation in the center area | region.

  In addition, with "temporary stop", the production design 70a swings small, the production design 70a is deformed small, and the player is shown as if the production design 70a is stopped (stopped completely). Not).

  Also, "normal reach" means that the same rendering pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one rendering pattern 70a fluctuates in the central area, and the reach with the highest expectation of jackpot It has become. In the present embodiment, the "normal reach" does not make a big hit, but the "normal reach" may make a big hit.

  In addition, "SP reach" is performed after normal reach, and has become a super reach with a higher expectation of jackpots than normal reach. For example, a special effect that causes the player to expect the jackpot game to be performed using almost the entire display area of the image display device as the three rendering symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the image display device It is supposed to be done.

  In addition, "SPSP reach" is a special reach that takes place after super reach and has a higher jackpot expectation than super reach. For example, the three effect designs 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device, and effects substantially more than "SP reach" are performed using substantially the entire display region of the image display device.

  In addition, with "all rotation reach", it is the reach where jackpot is decided. For example, it fluctuates at a low speed in a state where all the three rendering symbols 70a are identical and aligned, and a special rendering is performed more than "SPSP reach" using almost the entire display region of the image display device.

  In addition, with “chance presentation”, it is presentation that asks whether it will be a big hit or a small hit. For example, the three rendering symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the image display device but do not reach a reach state, and special effects are performed using almost the entire display region of the image display device.

  The first feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined in the short time game state rather than the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined in the non-time minor game state The point is that it is easy to determine a relatively short fluctuation time (the average fluctuation time becomes short). Therefore, the variation time of the special symbol can be changed between the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  A second feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the type of the special figure fluctuation pattern to be determined is the same without being changed by the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to see the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide an equitable game.

  A third feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the selection ratio of each special figure fluctuation pattern is the same without changing according to the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to see the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide an equitable game.

  In addition, the selection ratio of each special figure fluctuation pattern may be changed for each set value, or may be changed between odd setting and even setting, and the setting is low (for example, 1 to 2). It may be changed depending on whether the setting is high (for example, 3 to 4). In addition, a special pattern variation pattern dedicated to each set value is provided, a special pattern variation pattern dedicated to either odd setting or even setting is provided, and a special pattern variation pattern dedicated to the other is not provided, One of the low setting and the high setting may be provided with a dedicated special pattern variation pattern, and the other may not be provided with a dedicated special pattern variation pattern.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 14A is a first reference to be made in the prior determination in which the special view determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is determined before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It is a prior determination table for a special symbol, and FIG. 14 (b) shows the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47 before the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. It is a figure which shows the prior determination table for 2nd special symbols referred in the prior determination to determine.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b), the advance determination table includes the gaming state, the determination result of the big hit determination, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure The fluctuation pattern determination random number value, the special drawing scheduled fluctuation pattern as the determination result, and the starting opening winning combination designation command indicating the special drawing scheduled fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

  In the preliminary determination of the special view determination information, it is possible to determine which of "big hit", "small hit" and "losing" by the jackpot judgment random number value, and it is possible to judge the type of special symbol by the special symbol judgment random number value. Because it is possible to determine in advance the type of the special figure schedule variation pattern to be executed by the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation pattern determination random value, whether the jackpot winning command is a big hit or a small hit It becomes possible to specify whether or not the type of special symbol, the special figure scheduled variation pattern.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the prior determination table shown in FIG. 14 (a) or FIG. 14 (b) and determines the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination randomness Based on the numerical values, the special drawing scheduled variation pattern and the starting opening winning combination designation command are determined, and the starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Big winning opening opening mode judgment table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening mode determination table for converting the state of the first large winning opening 50 or the second large winning opening 53 in the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the big winning opening opening mode determination table, the special symbol stop special view data, the type of big winning opening to open, the maximum number of round games in the big hit game, and the big winning opening in one round game To the maximum number of winning prizes, the opening time from the start of the big hit game to the first round game, the maximum opening number of the big winning opening in each round game, and one opening of each round game The opening time of the big winning opening, the closing interval time for closing the big winning opening after the end of the round game, and the ending time from the end of the last round game to the end of the big hit game are correlated.

  The main CPU 110 a executes the first jackpot game when the stop special view data is “01”, and the main CPU 110 a performs a first game advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game when the stop special view data is “02”. 2 The big hit game is executed, and when the stop special view data is “03”, the third big hit game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second big hit game is executed.

(Playing state setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game. In the gaming state setting table, it is possible to execute the special symbol stop special view data, the winning time state data indicating the gaming state at the time of big hit, the short time gaming flag indicating that the short time gaming state is, and the short time gaming state There are a time reduction number (J) indicating the number of fluctuation displays, a high probability gaming flag indicating that the gaming state is high probability gaming state, and a high probability number (X) indicating the number of fluctuation displays executable in the high probability gaming state It is associated.

  Here, the "winning state data" is information indicating the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. And, the gaming state is composed of a combination of non-time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state, low probability gaming state and high probability gaming state.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and based on the stop special view data and the winning state data, the time saving game flag, the number of time reduction (J), the high probability game flag, and the high probability game flag The probability number (X) is to be determined.

  In addition, when the high probability gaming state is set, 50000 times may be set as the high probability number of times (X), but since the jackpot probability is 1/60 in the high probability gaming state, The second jackpot game and the third jackpot game become a jackpot game in which the next jackpot game is decided, since the next jackpot win is substantially determined.

  As a first feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16, even if it is the same stop special view data, the setting of the time saving game flag and the number of time reductions are made based on the winning state data (the gaming state when the big hit is won). (J) may be different.

  Specifically, in the case of stop special view data 01 (special symbol 01), "00H" indicating a low probability non-permanent short game state is stored as winning time state data regarding the time reduction game flag and the number of time reduction (J) If it is, the time saving game flag is not set at the end of the jackpot game, and the time saving number (J) is set to 0 times. On the other hand, if "01H" indicating low probability time short game state or "02H" indicating high probability time short game state is stored as the win time state data, the time short game flag is set at the end of the jackpot game. , Set the time reduction number (J) to 100 times. As a result, it is possible to change the number of times (J) depending on the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, and to give the player an interest in the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning.

  A second feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that the types of the short time game flag and the high probability game flag to be set are the same without being changed by the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change extremely depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Various storage areas of game work area)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the gaming work area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17A is a special view in which the special view determination information acquired when the gaming ball is won (entered) in the first starting opening 45 and / or the second starting opening 47 is stored. FIG. 17 (b) is a view showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special view determination information storage area, and FIG. 17 (c) is a view of the common game gate 44 with the game ball It is a common drawing determination information storage area in which common drawing determination information acquired when passing through is stored, and FIG. 17D is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the common drawing determination information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the special view determination information storage area stores the first special view determination information suspension storage in which the special view determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is stored. The second special view determination information holding storage area in which the special view determination information obtained based on the game area to the second starting opening 47 and the special view determination information storage area executing variation display is stored The first special view determination information storage area and the second special view determination information storage area are respectively divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit.

  The first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit and the fourth storage unit of the first special view determination information storage area are the first display 70C1 and the second display of the first storage icon display area 70C. It corresponds to the unit 70C2, the third display unit 70C3 and the fourth display unit 70C4, respectively. In addition, the first storage, the second storage, the third storage, and the fourth storage of the second special symbol storage area are the first display 70D1 and the second display 70D2 of the second storage icon display area 70D. It corresponds to the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4, respectively.

  Then, the number of special view determination information (hold information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special view determination information storage area becomes the first special view reserve number (U1), and these special view determinations The first hold icon of the number corresponding to the information is displayed on the first display unit 70C1 to the fourth display unit 70C4 of the first hold icon display area 70C. In addition, the number of special map determination information (hold information) stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special view determination information is the second special view reserve number (U2), and corresponds to the determination information The number of pending icons is displayed on the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D.

  In addition, the 0th storage section, which is a special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70E. Then, the icon corresponding to the special view determination information stored in the zeroth storage unit is displayed in the icon display area 70E.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, each storage unit stores a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing a special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random number value, and a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number value.

  And, when the game ball wins (enters the ball) in the first starting opening 45 and the special view determination information is acquired, the special view determination information is not stored among the first special view determination information holding storage areas. The acquired special map determination information is stored in the storage unit with a smaller number. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 47 and special figure determination information is acquired, the smallest number with no special figure determination information stored in the second special figure determination information pending storage area The acquired special map determination information is stored in the storage unit.

  The 0th storage unit, which is the special view determination information execution storage area, is the special view stored in the first storage unit of the first special view determination information suspension storage area when the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The determination information is shifted, and will be referred to in order to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special view determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special view determination information suspension storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol Will be referenced to perform.

  As shown in FIG. 17C, the common drawing determination information storage area is a common drawing determination information storage area in which the common drawing determination information acquired based on the passage of the gaming ball to the common drawing gate 44 is stored, and It is divided into a common drawing determination information storage area in which common drawing determination information being displayed is stored, and the common drawing determination information storage area is divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. Note that the number of pieces of common drawing determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the common drawing determination information storage area is the common drawing reservation number.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (d), each storage unit stores a collision judgment random number storage area for storing collision judgment random number values, and a regular symbol judgment random number memory for storing ordinary symbol judgment random numbers. It is divided into an area and a random number storage area for common pattern fluctuation pattern determination for storing a random value for common pattern fluctuation pattern determination.

  Then, when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing gate 44 and the common drawing determination information is acquired, among the common drawing determination information suspension storage areas, the common drawing determination information is acquired in the storage unit with the smallest number not stored. The common drawing determination information is stored.

  The 0th storage unit, which is a common drawing determination information execution storage area, shifts the common drawing determination information stored in the first storage unit of the common drawing determination information suspension storage area when the start condition of the variation display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Will be referred to in order to carry out the variable display of the symbol.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart. Note that, in the following description, processing that does not specify that the processing is based on the information program is processing based on the gaming program.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. The main processing is performed by inputting to the main CPU 110 a a system reset that occurs when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply substrate 160.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process. Specifically, a preparation process for starting control of a game, a setting change process for changing a setting value based on a setting change operation, a process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on setting confirmation operation, etc. are performed. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

  In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random number value and the reach determination random number value, and in step S51 the jackpot determination initial random number value, the special symbol determination initial random number value, the collision determination initial random number value Normal Update the initial random number for symbol determination.

  In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply substrate 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). It is determined whether or not a signal is input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S50. If the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S53.

  In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process proceeds to step S54 on the assumption that a complete blackout has occurred, and if not continuing for a predetermined period, an instantaneous blackout is possible in which the voltage of the power supply drops for a moment The process proceeds to step S52 as having sex.

  In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets the interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, and in step S55, the power supply cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the processing of the power supply cutoff has been started. Send. As a result, from the payout control board 120 that has received the power supply cutoff designation command, a remaining payout number designation command indicating the number of remaining payouts of the gaming ball stored in the payout RAM 121c is transmitted.

  In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout amount designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57. If the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process proceeds to step S58.

  In step S57, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a standby time for waiting for reception of the remaining payout amount designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 can not be performed.

  In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area. Specifically, when the remaining payout amount specification command is received, the remaining payout amount specified by the remaining payout amount specification command is saved, and when the remaining payout amount specification command is not received, the remaining payout amount specification command is stored. Save "0" as the number of payouts. Note that the number of remaining payouts saved here is referred to in the payout control process of timer interruption described later, and a command for specifying the number of payouts corresponding to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after power is restored. become.

  In step S59, the main CPU 110a clears the output port. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of the various displays and the various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

  In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates checksums (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the main RAM 110c, and saves the checksums in a predetermined area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it is possible to perform data abnormality determination of the RWM area by the checksum at the time of power on next time.

  In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that data in the RWM area is backed up (power is restored) in a predetermined area of the gaming RWM area, and prohibits RWM access in step S62. , And wait until the power supply is completely turned off.

  As described above, when the supply of the operation power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initialization process is performed, but with the occurrence of the instantaneous blackout (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of the operating power is resumed, the initialization process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed due to some factor when the instantaneous power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear processing are not executed. Since the machine does not perform an unintended operation, it is possible to secure the reliability of the gaming machine.

  In addition, at the time of power failure (complete power failure), the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program and saved in the RWM area for gaming, but the checksum by the information program May be calculated and saved in the information RWM area.

(Initial control process of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.

  First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initialization of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and performs start waiting processing of another substrate in step S13. Specifically, in order to prevent the command from the main control substrate 110 from being missed, the start of the payout control substrate 120 and the effect control substrate 130 is waited for one second.

  In step S14, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S15, transmits a release permission designation command to the payout control board 120. Thereby, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the launch of the gaming ball by the launch device 26.

  In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that power is restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process proceeds to step S17 as the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process proceeds to step S18 as the first power on.

  In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates checksums (abnormality determination data) of all the RWM areas of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, one checksum (abnormality determination data) is calculated without distinguishing between the game RWM area and the information RWM area.

  In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a, the RWM clear switch 111a and the release detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If the setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to shift to the setting change mode. If the setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

  In step S19, the main CPU 110a performs setting change processing. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, change (update) the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) which is the stage of the degree of game advantage, and initialize the game control state (for game Perform processing to initialize other than the setting value area of the RWM area. The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

  In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (no error in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S22. Transfer.

  When the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

  In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting change in progress flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the gaming RWM area. If the setting change in progress flag does not exist, the process proceeds to step S23 because the previous power off does not occur during the setting change process. If the setting in change flag is present, the previous power off is the setting change process. The processing is shifted to step S22 on the assumption that it has occurred. Note that the setting change in progress flag is saved in the game RWM area in setting change processing described later.

  In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs unreturnable error processing. Specifically, after displaying error information indicating a non-returnable error on the information display 113 and transmitting a non-returnable error designation command indicating that a non-returnable error has occurred to the effect control board 130, the timer assignment is performed. Set the interrupt prohibition that prohibits loading, clear the output port, and then output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 a non-returnable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-returnable error. Process to wait until the supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing a return impossible error notification is performed.

  The "non-return error" is an error state in which the control of the game is not performed (the control is not shifted to the control of the game), and is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without the setting change operation when the error that can not be reset occurs, the setting is not canceled even if the power switch is turned on. It is necessary to turn on the power switch with the change operation. During an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches and various sensors) is not monitored at all.

  The “unrecoverable error notification” is a notification for recognizing that a non-recoverable error has occurred, and the non-recoverable error screen on the image display device (“a non-recoverable error. Please change the settings. Or the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is completely turned on with a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or that the sound output device 9 has an unrecoverable error. This is to output a non-recoverable error sound ("unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) to the power off.

  In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a and the release detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If the RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24 to shift to the RWM clear mode, and if the RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S26.

  At step S24, the main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing areas other than the setting value area of the gaming RWM area) is performed. The details of the RWM clear process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

  In step S25, the main CPU 110a issues a power on designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low probability non-short game state as the normal gaming state). Transmit to the effect control board 130. Thereby, in the effect control board 130, a process for executing the power on notification is performed.

  The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and displays an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "123") at the time of power-on on the image display device. Or the frame illumination device 10 or the panel illumination device 74 is fully lit in a predetermined emission color (eg, white) for a predetermined period (eg, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9 Power-on alarm sound ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

  In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the release detection switch 31a are in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process proceeds to step S27 to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S28.

  In step S27, the main CPU 110a performs setting confirmation processing. Specifically, a process for displaying the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game use RWM area on the information display unit 113 is performed. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

  In step S28, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power is turned off.

  In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits, to the effect control board 130, a power supply recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the occurrence of the power failure. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like to be described later and executing the power supply recovery notification is performed.

  The "power recovery notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was turned off, and a predetermined power recovery screen (image) indicating that the power is restored to the image display device Display for a period (for example, 30 seconds), or turn on the frame illumination device 10 or the panel illumination device 74 for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) The power supply recovery alarm sound (buzzer sound) indicating that the power supply has been restored (from a power failure) is output from the output device 9 over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

  In step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits, to the effect control board 130, another command (a special symbol storage designation command to be described later, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc.). As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special views pending, and a process for displaying the first pending icon and the second pending icon on the image display device is performed.

  In step S31, the main CPU 110a activates CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), permits all interrupts in step S32, and ends the current initialization process. .

  As described above, with respect to the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, the setting change, the RWM clear, and the setting confirmation can not be easily performed by setting a plurality of conditions (operations). Cheating can be suppressed, and security of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set in the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set in the RWM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation. It is possible to increase the security of an event in which an action is likely to be taken, and to effectively prevent fraud.

  In addition, when the checksum is abnormal, the return impossible error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so the gaming machine performs an unexpected operation and bothers the game shop or the player. The reliability of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Also, if there is a setting change in progress flag, that is, if the previous power off occurred during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, return impossible error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game By doing this, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the state in which the setting value not intended by the game arcade side is set, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

  The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation include that the release detection switch 31a is in the ON state, but do not include that the release detection switch 31a is in the ON state. Good.

  If it is determined that the backup flag is not present (the power is turned on for the first time) and it is determined that the setting change operation has not been made, return processing is impossible if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20 thereafter. Is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program initializes (0 clears) the RWM area for gaming and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. At the same time, the information RWM area may be initialized (0 cleared) by the information program, and the process may be shifted to step S25.

  In addition, when it is determined that the backup flag is present (power is restored) and it is determined that the setting change operation has not been performed, return impossible error processing is executed if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20 thereafter. When the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game program initializes (0 clears) the RWM area for gaming and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. The information RWM area may be initialized (0 cleared) by the information program, and the process may be shifted to step S25.

  Also, although the power on designation command and the power recovery designated command are transmitted including information indicating the current gaming state, the current gaming state is transmitted after the power on designated command and the power restoration designated command are transmitted. A game state designating command indicating may be transmitted.

  In addition, at the time of occurrence of power off or at the time of power on, the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum may be calculated by the information program. . In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

  In addition, although the checksum of all RWM areas is calculated at the time of power interruption or power on, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area are calculated separately. If one of the check sums is abnormal, processing may be shifted to an unrecoverable error processing.

  Also, although the abnormality determination of the RWM area is performed by the checksum of the RWM area, the abnormality determination of the RWM area is performed by the RWM parity adjustment data calculated so that the exclusive OR of the RWM area becomes 0. You may do so.

  In addition, by not determining the presence / absence of the setting change flag, even if the previous power-off occurs during the setting change, the return impossible error processing may not be performed.

(Main control board setting change process)
The setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing setting change processing of the main control board 110.

  First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a saves a setting change in progress flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the game RWM area. Note that the presence or absence of the setting change flag is referred to in step S21 of the above-described initial setting process.

  In step S19-2, from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, the output of a setting change in-progress signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed is started. As a result, processing for receiving a setting change-in-progress signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

  At step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing setting change notification to notify that the setting value is being changed is performed.

  “Setting change notification” indicates that the setting display screen showing that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display device, or the setting is performed while changing the setting of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. It is to make all lights on with the luminescent color of (for example, white). Note that a setting change notification sound (“setting change in progress”) indicating that the setting is being changed may be output from the voice output device 9.

  In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) (a determination information area, a game data area, etc.) other than the setting value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progressing state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data of the gaming RWM area before power-off is not taken over. Specifically, progress control of the game will be started from the low probability non-time game state.

  At step 19-5, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after inhibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the RWM area for gaming, and processing for calling a predetermined information program is performed by the CALL instruction.

  At step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM matches the checksum calculated in step S17 described above. If the checksum is normal (no abnormality in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S19-7. If the checksum is not normal (an abnormality in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S19-8. Transfer.

  In step S19-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) an error information area (other than the performance information area) of the information RWM area. As a result, the determination state of the error is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the determination state of the error before the power-off is not taken over. Specifically, progress control of the game is started on the assumption that no error has occurred.

  In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) all areas (performance information area, error information area) of the information RWM area. As a result, data for calculating performance information of the gaming machine 1 and an error determination state are initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the information RWM area before power-off Data will not be taken over. Specifically, progress control of the game is started on the assumption that there is no game history.

  In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon game program recovery. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area, and processing for permitting interruption and returning to the gaming program is performed.

  In step S19-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting value saved in the setting value area of the gaming RWM area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is in the appropriate range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S19-12, and the set value is not in the appropriate range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past) In the case of step S19-11, the initial value "1" is set as the set value. At this time, only the provisional set value is set, and the initial set value is not saved in the set value area of the game RWM area.

  At step S19-12, main CPU 110a causes information display unit 113 to display the current setting value. Specifically, numbers (1 to 4 in this case) indicating setting values are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display unit 113. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming clerk to grasp the set value before the change by checking the information display 113.

  At step S19-13, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has been switched from the OFF state to the ON state. If the setting value update operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-14. If the setting value update operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-17.

  At step S19-14, the main CPU 110a updates the setting value by +1, and performs setting value correction processing at step S19-15. Specifically, when the updated set value is “5” which exceeds the appropriate range, the set value is corrected to “1”.

  At step S19-16, main CPU 110a causes information display 113 to display the current setting value. Specifically, the setting value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is updated. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming clerk to grasp the setting value after updating by checking the information display 113.

  At step S19-17, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting value fixing operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state. If the setting value fixing operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S19-18 as the setting value is determined (the setting change mode is ended), and if the setting value fixing operation is not performed, the setting value is updated. The process moves to step S19-13 as having a possibility of being performed.

  In step S19-18, main CPU 110a saves the set value in the set value area of the game RWM area, and in step S19-19 ends the display of the set value in information display unit 113, and in step S19-20. The output of the setting change-in-progress signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 is ended. As a result, processing for ending acceptance of the setting change in-progress signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

  In step S19-21, the main CPU 110a clears the setting change in progress flag saved in the game RWM area, and ends the current setting change process.

  Thereafter, in step S25 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, the power on designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130, and the process for ending the setting change notification and executing the power on notification is It will be done.

  As described above, even if the set value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value “1” is set as the set value, so that an indefinite value is set as the set value and the gaming machine It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine without causing inconveniences to the gaming shop or the player by performing an unexpected operation.

  Also, immediately after the setting change processing is started, the setting change in progress signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the output of the setting change in progress signal is ended just before the setting change processing is completed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that processing (setting change) related to security has started and ended in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer etc.), and it can be used to detect fraud. Become.

  Also, if the checksum is normal, only the error information area of the information RWM area is initialized, so the data saved in the performance information area (historical information such as a normal base value) is left. By the convenience of the game arcade side, it is possible to initialize the state regarding the error determination, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience.

  In addition, during the setting change process (display of the setting change screen), an input device other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, Monitor the presence or absence of signal input from the second start opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a) It is supposed not to.

  In other words, the occurrence of winning (entering) of the game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 53) Even if a prize is generated during the setting change process (display of the setting change screen), the prize is invalidated by not being monitored (detected) (a payout number designation command described later is not transmitted to the payout control board 120). And the game balls are not paid out. In addition, since the occurrence of various errors is not monitored (detected) (an error designation command described later is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), an error occurs during the setting change processing (display of the setting changing screen). Also, no error notification is given. Therefore, it is possible to reduce processing load without performing unnecessary processing under a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player is playing a game or performing an illegal action during setting change.

  Although the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized before the setting value fixing operation is performed, the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initially set after the setting value fixing operation is performed. May be performed. Specifically, the processes of steps S19-4 to S19-9 may be performed after step S19-18. Further, the game RWM area and the information RWM area may be initialized both before and after the setting value fixing operation.

  In addition, although the setting value fixing operation was determined to be from the ON state to the OFF state of the setting key switch 112a, the RWM clear switch 111a may be from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch is OFF. The state may be changed to the ON state, or the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state. The detection switch (for example, general winning opening detection switch 43a etc.) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be turned from the OFF state to the ON state, or from the opening detection switch 31a from the OFF state It may be turned on.

  The setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change process, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change process, but the setting change start command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is finished.

(Modification of setting change process)
A modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110. Here, only the parts different from the setting change process of FIG. 20 will be described, the same step numbers are given to the parts that match, and the description will be omitted.

  In the modification of the setting change process shown in FIG. 21, steps S19-17A and S19-17B are provided between step S19-17 and step S19-18 in the setting change process shown in FIG.

  At step S19-17A, the overall CPU 141a displays the set value determined on the information display 113. Specifically, the set value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is maintained, and the DP (decimal point) of the 7-segment LED on which the set value is displayed is lighted. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming clerk to confirm that the set value has been confirmed by checking the information display 113 and to grasp the set value which has been determined.

  At step S19-17B, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not there has been a setting change end operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the RW clear switch 111a has been switched from the OFF state to the ON state. If the setting change end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-18 to end the setting change mode. If the setting change end operation has not been performed, the process of step S19-17B is repeatedly performed.

  As described above, since the set value determined until the setting change end operation is displayed on the information display 113, the determined set value can be accurately grasped, and a gaming clerk misses the determined set value. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconveniences.

  In addition, since the display mode of the setting value before confirmation and the display mode of the setting value after confirmation are different, it is possible to accurately grasp that the setting value is confirmed, and the setting change end before performing the setting value confirmation operation It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation is performed.

  Although the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initialized before the setting value fixing operation is performed, the game RWM area and the information RWM area are initially set after the setting value fixing operation is performed. May be performed. Specifically, the processes in steps S19-4 to S19-9 may be performed after step S19-17A. Further, the game RWM area and the information RWM area may be initialized both before and after the setting value fixing operation.

  In addition, although the setting change end operation was determined to be from the OFF state to the ON state of the RWM clear switch 111a, the release detection switch 31a may be from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch is OFF. The state may be changed to the ON state, or the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 so that the touch sensor 15a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state. The detection switch (for example, general winning opening detection switch 43a etc.) provided in a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be turned from the OFF state to the ON state, or from the opening detection switch 31a from the OFF state It may be turned on.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clear process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

  First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is the appropriate range (1 to 4 here). If the set value is in the appropriate range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S24-2 and the set value is not in the appropriate range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past) If yes, the process moves on to step S24-10.

  In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a starts outputting a RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that RWM clear is in progress from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Thereby, processing for receiving the RWM clear signal is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

  In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, processing for executing RWM clear preparation notification for notifying that RWM clear is to be performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

  “RWM clear preparation notification” displays a clear confirmation screen indicating that RWM clear is to be performed by operating the RWM clear switch 111 a on the image display device, or clears the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 by RWM. During the confirmation, the entire light emission is performed with a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white). Note that an alarm sound during confirmation indicating that the RWM clear is being confirmed ("The RWM is cleared by the operation of the RWM clear switch") may be output from the voice output device 9.

  At step S24-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether a clear confirmation operation has been made. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has been switched from the OFF state to the ON state. If the clear confirmation operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S24-5. If the clear confirmation operation is not performed, the process of step S24-4 is repeatedly performed.

  In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) other than the setting value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progressing state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and data (other than the set value) of the gaming RWM area before clearing RWM is not taken over. Become.

  In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a performs a process for calling an information program. Specifically, after inhibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the RWM area for gaming, and processing for calling a predetermined information program is performed by the CALL instruction.

  In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a initializes (0 clears) an error information area to be used for various error determinations in the information RWM area. As a result, the determination state of the error is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the determination state of the error before clearing RWM is not taken over.

  In step S24-8, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon return of the game program. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area, and processing for permitting interruption and returning to the gaming program is performed.

  At step S24-9, the main CPU 110a ends the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. As a result, processing for ending the acceptance of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is performed outside the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer or the like). When this process ends, the current RWM clear process ends.

  Thereafter, in step S25 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, the power on designation command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130, and the process for ending the RWM clear preparation notification and executing the power on notification. Will be done.

  In step S24-10, the main CPU 110a performs unreturnable error processing. Specifically, after setting value error information is displayed on the information display unit 113 and a recovery impossible error designation command indicating that a recovery impossible error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control board 130, timer interruption is prohibited. After setting the interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 outputs a recovery impossible error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a recovery impossible error, and the power supply is completely completed. Perform processing to wait until it is turned off.

  As described above, when the setting value is not within the appropriate range, the game machine performs an unexpected operation by executing the return impossible error process of stopping the progress of the game and stopping the progress of the game. No longer cause inconvenience to the game arcade or the player, and it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

  Also, immediately after the RWM clear process is started, the RWM clear in progress signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the output of the RWM clear in progress signal ends just before the RWM clear process is finished. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the processing (RWM clear) related to the security has started and ended in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, the hall computer etc.), and it can be used for discovery of fraud Become.

  Also, during the RWM clear process (display of the clear confirmation screen), an input device other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, first (2) Does not monitor the presence or absence of signal input from the start opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a) It is supposed to be.

  In other words, the occurrence of winning (entering) of the game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 53) Even if a prize is generated during RWM clear processing (display of the clear confirmation screen) by not being monitored (detected) (the number-of-payouts designation command described later is not transmitted to the payout control board 120), the prize is regarded as invalid. And the game balls are not paid out. Also, by not monitoring (detecting) the occurrence of various errors (the error designation command is not sent to the effect control board 130), even if an error occurs during the RWM clear processing (display of the clear confirmation screen), an error notification Is not supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce processing load without performing unnecessary processing under a situation where it is difficult for a player during an RWM clear to play a game or an illegal act.

  When it is determined in step S24-1 that the set value is not within the appropriate range, the process is shifted to return impossible error processing, but when it is determined in step S24-1 that the set value is not within the appropriate range. The initial value "1" may be set as the set value, and the process may proceed to the process of step S24-2.

  Also, although the RWM clear designation command is sent at the start of the RWM clear processing and the power on designation command is sent after the RWM clear processing is finished, the RWM clear start designation command is sent instead of the RWM clear designation command. Alternatively, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power on designation command. In this case, the RWM clear end designation command may be sent at the end of the RWM clear process, or may be sent after the RWM clear process is finished.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110.

  First, in step S26-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is the appropriate range (1 to 4 here). If the set value is in the appropriate range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S26-2 and the set value is not in the appropriate range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past) If yes, the process moves on to step S26-8.

  In step S26-2, the main CPU 110a starts outputting a setting confirmation in-progress signal (security signal) indicating that setting confirmation is in progress from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Thus, processing for receiving a signal (security signal) during setting confirmation is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like).

  In step S26-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, processing for executing a setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

  “Setting confirmation notification” displays a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the image display device, or predetermined light emission over the setting confirmation of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 It is to make all lights on in a color (for example, white). Note that the setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed may be output from the voice output device 9.

  In step S26-4, the main CPU 110a displays the current setting value on the information display unit 113. Specifically, numbers (1 to 4 in this case) indicating setting values are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display unit 113. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming clerk to grasp the current setting value by checking the information display 113.

  At step S26-5, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a confirmation termination operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state. If the confirmation end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S26-6. If the confirmation end operation has not been performed, the process of step S26-5 is repeated.

  In step S26-6, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the setting value on the information display unit 113, and in step S26-7, a signal (security signal) during setting confirmation from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Finish the output of. As a result, processing for ending reception of a signal (security signal) during setting confirmation is performed outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer or the like). When this process ends, the present setting confirmation process ends.

  Thereafter, in step S29 of the initial setting process shown in FIG. 19, the power recovery specification command is transmitted to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130, and the process for ending the setting confirmation notification and executing the power recovery notification is performed. It will be done.

  At step S26-8, the main CPU 110a performs an unrecoverable error process. Specifically, after setting value error information is displayed on the information display unit 113 and a recovery impossible error designation command indicating that a recovery impossible error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control board 130, timer interruption is prohibited. After disabling the interrupt and clearing the output port, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 outputs a recovery impossible error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a recovery impossible error, and the power supply is completely cut off. Process to wait until it is done.

  As described above, when the setting value is not within the appropriate range, the game machine performs an unexpected operation by executing the return impossible error process of stopping the progress of the game and stopping the progress of the game. No longer cause inconvenience to the game arcade or the player, and it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

  In addition, immediately after the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation in-progress signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and the output of the setting confirmation in-progress signal ends just before the setting confirmation process is completed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that processing (setting confirmation) related to security has started and ended in the gaming machine 1 outside the gaming machine 1 (for example, a hall computer etc.), and it can be used to detect fraudulent activity. Become.

  In addition, during the setting confirmation process (display of the setting change screen), an input device other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, Monitor the presence or absence of signal input from the second start opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a) It is supposed not to.

  In other words, the occurrence of winning (entering) of the game ball to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 53) Even if a prize is generated during the setting confirmation process (display of the setting change screen), the prize is invalidated by not monitoring (detecting) (the number-of-payouts designation command described later is not transmitted to the payout control board 120). And the game balls are not paid out. Also, by not monitoring (detecting) the occurrence of various errors (the error designation command is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), an error notification based on the occurrence of an error in the setting confirmation process (display of the setting change screen) Is not supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce processing load without performing unnecessary processing under a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player is playing a game or performing an illegal activity during setting confirmation.

  If it is determined in step S26-1 that the set value is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S26-2 by setting an initial value "1" as the set value, instead of shifting to the return impossible error process. You may make it shift.

  Also, the setting confirmation specification command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation process, and the power recovery specification command is sent after the setting confirmation process, but the setting confirmation start specification command is sent instead of the setting confirmation specification command. Alternatively, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power on designation command. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation processing, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation processing is ended.

  In the present embodiment, during the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting check process, the setting change in progress signal, the RWM clear in progress signal, and the setting check in progress signal from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Although such security signals are output, these signals may be output from separate output terminals.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the setting change process, the RWM clearing process, and the setting confirmation process, the security signal is output from the start of the process to the end of the process. The security signal may be output for a predetermined period (for example, one second) at the timing of.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during execution of the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, an input device other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a , 1st starting opening detection switch 45a, 2nd starting opening detection switch 47a, 1st big winning opening detection switch 50a, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 53a, magnetic detection sensor 55a, electric wave detection sensor 56a, out sphere detection switch 57a Although the presence or absence of the signal input from (1) is not monitored, it may be monitored. In this case, only the presence or absence of signal input from the input device may be monitored, or signal input of only a specific input device related to security such as the magnetic detection sensor 55a or the radio wave detection sensor 56a may be monitored. An error designation command may be sent to the effect control board 130 when there is an input.

(Main RAM initialization timing and initialization area)
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the timing of initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization area.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the initialization trigger of the main RAM 110c includes the case where the setting change process is executed and the case where the RWM clear process is executed. In the setting change process, the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is normal. And the RWM area of the main RAM 110c may be abnormal.

  The game RWM area includes a setting value area in which the setting value is stored, a determination information area in which the checksum of the main RAM 110c is stored, a game data area in which data relating to the progress of the game is stored, and data. A stack area for evacuation and an unused area in which any data is not stored are provided.

  In the RWM area for information, there are stored a performance information area in which information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 (count value of gaming balls to be described later, normal base value described later) and information used for determination of various errors An error information area, a stack area for saving data, and an unused area in which any data is not stored are provided.

  If the initialization trigger is a setting change process and the RWM area is abnormal, an area other than the setting value area is initialized (0 cleared). On the other hand, when the initialization trigger is the setting change process and the RWM area is not abnormal, or when the initialization trigger is the RWM clear process, other than the setting value area, the performance information area, and the stack area of the information RWM area The region of is to be initialized (0 cleared).

  Although the performance information area and the error information area are provided in the information RWM area, at least one may be provided in the gaming RWM area, and even in this case, the performance information area and the error information area are initialized. The relationship between the trigger and the area to be initialized may be the same as described above. For example, when the error information area is provided in the gaming RWM area, when the setting change process or the RWM clearing process is executed, the gaming RWM area is initialized but the information RWM area is not initialized.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

  In this timer interrupt process, clock pulses are input at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 after the initial setting process of the main process is completed. To be performed.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area, and performs time control processing in step S110. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the open time of the special electric combination.

  At step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process. Specifically, a jackpot determination random number value, a special symbol determination random number value, a special pattern variation pattern determination random number value, a hit determination random number value, a normal symbol determination random number value, and a common pattern variation pattern determination random number value Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are incremented by one and updated. In addition, when the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter rotates one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the circulation The random number value is newly updated by setting the initial random number value as a new round initial value.

  In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs initial random number value update processing. Specifically, similarly to step S30, processing is performed to update the jackpot determination initial random number value, the special symbol determination initial random number value, the hit determination initial random number value, and the normal symbol determination initial random number value.

  At step S200, main CPU 110a performs input control processing. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first large winning opening detection switch 50a, the second large winning opening detection switch 53a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data. The details of the input control process will be described later.

  At step S300, main CPU 110a performs special image special power control processing. Specifically, the determination of the special view determination information obtained based on the game ball winning in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the big winning opening Processing such as opening / closing (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 53), setting of the gaming state, etc. is performed. The details of the special figure special power control process will be described later.

  In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a computer program control process. Specifically, processing such as determination of the common drawing determination information acquired based on passage of the gaming ball to the common drawing gate 44, fluctuation display of the normal symbol, opening and closing of the second starting opening 47 (auxiliary game) and the like is performed.

  In addition, the type of the hit normal symbol determined as the determination result of the common symbol determination information performed in the common symbol general control process and the type of the lost normal symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes possible for the player to play with peace of mind, without becoming too complicated to be entertaining.

  In addition, the selection ratio of various ordinary symbols determined as the judgment result of the common drawing determination information performed in the common drawing general control process, and the selection ratio of various lost ordinary symbols become constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change extremely depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs payout control processing. Specifically, with reference to various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second A process for transmitting a payout amount designation command corresponding to the special winning opening 53) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, processing for paying out the winning balls from the payout device 95 is executed by the payout control board 120.

  At step S600, main CPU 110a performs data creation processing. Specifically, external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening opening and closing data output to the second start opening opening and closing solenoid 48b, the first winning opening opening and closing solenoid 51b, the second big winning Large winning opening opening and closing data to be output to the opening and closing solenoid 54b, the first special symbol display 60, the special symbol display data to be output to the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display 62, the first 1) A process is performed to create data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be outputted to the normal symbol hold display 65.

  In step S700, main CPU 110a performs a process for calling an information program. Specifically, after inhibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the RWM area for gaming, and processing for calling a target information program is performed by the CALL instruction.

  At step S720, main CPU 110a performs abnormality determination processing (information program). Specifically, it is determined whether or not various errors (illegal prize error, abnormal prize error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, operation error described later) have occurred, and an error designation command corresponding to the generated error. Processing for transmitting to the effect control board 130. As a result, processing for performing error notification by the effect control board 130 is performed.

  At step S740, main CPU 110a performs gaming ball counting processing (information program). Specifically, the number of payouts (the number of payouts) which are to be paid out by the game balls to the various winning openings and the number of outs (the number of balls which are discharged to the game area) discharged from the game area 5a. ) To count (collect) etc. The details of the game ball counting process will be described later.

  At step S760, main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program). Specifically, processing of calculating the performance information of the gaming machine from the number of payouts (number of payouts) and the number of outs (number of out balls) counted (collected) in the game ball counting process is performed. The details of the performance information calculation process will be described later.

  At step S770, main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program). Specifically, processing for setting performance display data for causing the information display 113 to display the performance information calculated in the performance information calculation process is performed. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

  In step S 790, the main CPU 110 a performs processing upon return of the game program. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area, and processing for permitting interruption and returning to the gaming program is performed.

  At step S800, main CPU 110a performs output control processing. Specifically, port output processing for outputting signals such as external output data, starting opening opening / closing data, big winning opening opening / closing data, etc. created in step S600 above, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display Display output processing for outputting signals such as data, normal symbol hold display data, and performance display data (performance information) set in step S770 above to various displays, or set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c Executes a payout command transmission process of transmitting a command to the payout control board 120, and an effect command transmission process of transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 or the effect control board 130 Do the processing.

  In step S900, main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

  As described above, since the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode, counting of the number of payouts and the number of outs, calculation of performance information of the gaming machine, Since the display of the performance information of the gaming machine is not performed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an input control process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has won the general winning opening 43, and the payout ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Do the processing.

  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether a detection signal is input from the first large winning opening detection switch 50a or the second large winning opening detection switch 53a, that is, the gaming ball wins the first large winning opening 50 or the second large winning opening 53 It is determined whether or not it has been determined, and processing for paying out the prize balls from the dispensing device 95 is performed.

  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start opening 45, and the award ball is paid out from the payout device 95 And processing for acquiring and storing the special view determination information. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input process will be described later.

  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs second start port detection switch input processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the second start opening detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has won the second start opening 47, and the award ball is paid out from the payout device 95 And processing for acquiring and storing the special view determination information.

  In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the drawing gate 44, and processing for acquiring and storing drawing determination information. I do.

(First start port detection switch input processing of main control board)
The first starting opening detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first starting opening detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input. If the detection signal from the first start opening detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first start opening detection switch 45a is not input, the present first 1) The start port detection switch input process is ended.

  At step S230-2, main CPU 110a performs processing for adding data indicating three prize balls to three prize ball counters used for three prize balls and updating the data, and at step S230-3, the special view determination Information (random number value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

  At step S230-4, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special view reservation number (U1) is less than four. If the first special drawing reservation number (U1) is less than four, the process proceeds to step S230-5. If the first special drawing reservation number (U1) is not less than four, the current first starting opening End detection switch input processing.

  In step S230-5, main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the first special map reservation number (U1) to update (U1 U U1 +1), and in step S230-6, the first special image reservation number A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the first hold icon corresponding to the first special view hold number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

  At step S230-7, main CPU 110a searches for an available storage unit in order from the first storage unit of the first special view determination information storage area, and acquires the available storage unit at step S230-3. The figure determination information is stored.

  At step S230-8, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is in the non-time-short game state. If it is in the non-time short game state, the processing is transferred to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time short game state, the current first start opening detection switch input process is ended.

  At step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs a first prior determination process. In this first prior determination process, the special view determination information acquired this time is determined in advance before the variation display of the first special symbol is performed with reference to the prior determination table shown in FIG. A first start opening winning combination designating command for notifying the effect control board 130 of a figure scheduled variation pattern) is generated.

  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting opening winning combination designation command generated in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

  Thus, the first start winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as a first start hole winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start hole winning designation command performs the first start. Pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, expecting a big hit game to be executed across one or more variable displays before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the mouth prize designation command is started ) Can be performed.

  In addition, since the same processing as the first start opening detection switch input processing is performed also in the second start opening detection switch input processing, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the three prize ball counter, the first special view reservation number (U1), the first special view determination information storage area, non-time short game state, the first prior determination process, the portion of the first start opening winning combination designation command, the second start opening detection switch 47a, two prize ball counter, The second special view reserve number (U2), the second special view determination information reserve storage area, the time saving game state, the second prior determination process, and the second starting opening winning combination designation command may be read.

  In the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the second special view reservation number (U2) is “4”, it may be more or less than this. In addition, the upper limit value of the second special view reservation number may be smaller than the upper limit value of the first special view reservation number. Furthermore, the second reserved storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special view determination information only in the zeroth storage unit of the second special view determination information storage area.

(Special drawing special power control processing of main control board)
The special figure charge control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special figure charge control process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S301, main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special power process data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special power process data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special electric power control process ends.

  Specifically, if the special figure special power processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for starting variable display of the special symbol is executed based on the pending storage, and the special figure special power processing data = If it is 1, the special symbol variation process (step S320) for stopping and displaying the special symbol by the lapse of the variation time is executed, and if the special figure special power processing data = 2, the special symbol which has stopped and has stopped Execute special symbol stop processing (step S330) to shift processing to big hit game and small hit game according to the type of character, and if special figure special power processing data = 3, it is a big hit game for executing big hit game The process (step S340) is executed, and if the special figure special power process data = 4, the jackpot game ending process (step S350) for ending the jackpot game is executed. If Figure electrically movable device control processing data = 5, executes a small hit game processing for executing small prize game (step S360). The details of each process will be described later.

  The "special figure special power process data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the special figure special power control process as described later, so that the necessary subroutines in the game will be properly processed. .

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is in progress. If the special symbol variation display is in progress, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended. If the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the process moves to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special view reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. If the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. Transfer.

  At step S310-3, main CPU 110a subtracts “1” from the second special figure reservation number (U2) to update it, and corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction at step S310-6. A special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the display of the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the icon is performed.

  In step S310-7, main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area of main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, in the second special view determination information storage area Shift processing of stored data is performed, and the special map determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special view determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special view determination information storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special view determination information storage area. In addition, the special view determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special view determination information storage area is shifted to the zeroth storage unit, which is the special view determination information execution storage area, and stored in the zeroth storage unit. The special figure determination information used in the previous game played is deleted.

  On the other hand, at step S310-4, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special map reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special drawing reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-5. If the first special drawing reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1. Transfer.

  Main CPU 110a subtracts “1” from the first special drawing reservation number (U1) in step S310-5 to update it, and in step S310-6, the special corresponding to the first special drawing reservation number (U1) after subtraction. A symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the display of the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the icon is performed.

  In step S310-7, main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area of main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol hold storage area. The shift processing of the stored data is performed to shift the special view determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the immediately preceding storage unit.

  For example, the special view determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol storage area. In addition, the special view determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol suspension storage area is shifted to the 0th storage unit, which is the special view determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage unit The special view determination information used in the previous game is deleted.

  In addition, along with the shift process of the special view determination information in step S310-8, the main symbol 110c is special symbol hold display data indicating the first special view reserve number (U1) and the second special view reserve number (U2) after subtraction. Set in the predetermined area of Thus, the display contents of the first special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64 are updated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special view determination information suspension storage area is prioritized over the first special view determination information suspension storage area and shifted (the second special view reserve number is (1) It was decided to make a priority to subtract more than the number of special drawing reservations, but in the order in which the game balls entered the starting opening, the first special drawing judgment information holding storage area or the second special drawing judgment information holding storage area The shift may be made (the number of the first special figure reserve number and the second special figure reserve number may be subtracted in the winning order), or the first special figure determination information reserve storage area may be prioritized over the second special figure determination information reserve storage area. And may be shifted (the first special map reservation number may be subtracted from the second special image reservation number).

  In step S311, main CPU 110a determines whether it is a big hit or stop special figure data of a special symbol based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. Execute the jackpot determination process. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In step S312, main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of main RAM 110c. Thereby, a special symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for determining the effect pattern 70a to be stopped and displayed as a result of the change effect is performed.

  The main CPU 110a determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, in step S313. I do. The details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

  In step S314, main CPU 110a sets a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for determining a fluctuation effect pattern which is an effect aspect of the fluctuation effect performed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed.

  In step S315, main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , To start the variation display of special symbols. Thereby, the lighting data of the LED for executing the fluctuation display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of the above-mentioned step S700, and the created lighting data is outputted by the output control process of the above-mentioned step S800. The variation display of the special symbol is performed in the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

  In step S317, main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special figure special power process data, and the current special symbol storage determination process is ended. Do.

  In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a customer waiting state flag indicating that a customer waiting state is in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended. If the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to the state in which the special symbol variation display and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement that the normal symbol variation display and the auxiliary game are not executed is included in the requirement May be

  In step S319-2, main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of main RAM 110c. In step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is in a waiting state is used for effecting main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the present special symbol storage determination process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for executing a customer waiting effect for promoting the player to play a game is performed.

(Jumping judgment processing of main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process in the main control board 110.

  In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the gaming RWM area, and selects the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10 in step S311-2. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is shifted from the first special figure determination information suspension storage area, as shown in FIG. If the jackpot judgment table for the first special symbol shown in) is selected and shifted from the second special view judgment information storage area, the jackpot for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (b) Select a judgment table.

  In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a checks the current probability gaming state and the jackpot determination random number value against the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won. If the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S311-4. If the jackpot is not won, the process proceeds to step S311-6.

  In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets winning state data (any of 00H to 02H) according to the current gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, FIG. The special symbol determination table for jackpot shown in) is selected, and the process proceeds to step S311-9.

  In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a checks the current probability gaming state and the jackpot determination random number value against the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the player has won a small hit. If the small winning is won, the process proceeds to step S311-7. If the small winning is not performed, the process proceeds to step S311-8.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for small hitting shown in FIG. 11C, and shifts the process to step S311-9.

  In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for losing shown in FIG. 11B, and shifts the process to step S311-9.

  In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a checks the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which the big hit determination (lottery determination) is to be performed (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) and the special symbol determination random number value on the special symbol determination table. Then, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display performed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is determined.

  In step S311-10, main CPU 110a sets stop special figure data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of main RAM 110c, and ends the present jackpot determination process.

(Special pattern change pattern judgment processing of main control board)
The special view fluctuation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is in the non-time saving game state. If it is in the non-time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S313-2, and if it is not the non-time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S313-3.

  At step S313-2, main CPU 110a selects the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 12, and shifts the process to step S311-4.

  At step S313-3, main CPU 110a selects the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 13 and moves the process to step S310-7-4.

  In step S313-4, main CPU 110a collates the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table with the special symbol fluctuation judgment result, the special symbol type, the special symbol fluctuation random number value, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table in the special symbol fluctuation pattern. Determine the pattern.

  In step S313-5, main CPU 110a sets a variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern to a predetermined area of main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6 the special figure variation corresponding to the determined variation pattern A pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the present special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is ended. As a result, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the fluctuation effect pattern which is the effect aspect of the fluctuation effect is performed.

(Special symbol variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S315 has elapsed. If the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S320-2 to stop the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and if the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is continued, This special symbol change process ends.

  In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a sets data for stopping and displaying the special symbol according to the stop special figure data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c, and stops and displays the special symbol. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result of the jackpot is notified to the player.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a symbol determination command corresponding to the stop special view data set in the main RAM 110c in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for stopping and displaying the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is performed.

  At step S320-4, main CPU 110a sets the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special symbol to a predetermined area of main RAM 110c, and at step S320-5, the special figure special power processing data is "2". Set and finish the special symbol variation process this time.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stopping process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320-4 has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2. If the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is ended in order to continue the stop display of the special symbol.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game end determination process. Specifically, when the time-saving game flag indicating that the time-saving game mode is set in the main RAM 110c, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving number (J) stored in the main RAM 110c, and the time-saving number is "0". If so, the processing is ended after transitioning to the non-time saving game state by clearing the time saving game flag.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs high probability game end determination processing. Specifically, when the high probability game flag indicating that the main RAM 110c is in the high probability gaming state is set, the high probability number (X) stored in the main RAM 110c is decremented by 1 and the high probability number When (X) is “0”, the process is terminated after the high probability gaming flag is cleared to shift to the low probability gaming state.

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designating command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a game state specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for updating the game state grasped by the effect control board 130 or updating the effect mode is performed.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is the big hit special symbol. If it is the jackpot special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-6, and if it is not the jackpot special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-9.

  In step S330-6, main CPU 110a prepares to set special figure special power process data to "3" and transfer the process to jackpot game processing, and in step S330-7, the time-saving game flag stored in main RAM 110c. By clearing the high probability game flag, the number of times of time reduction (J) and the number of times of high probability (X), transition to the low probability non-time game state is made.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot start preparation setting processing. Specifically, the type of the big hit game corresponding to the stop special view data is determined from the big winning opening open mode determination table shown in FIG. 15, and the control data corresponding to the type of the big hit game is specified.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a small hitting special symbol. If it is the small hitting special symbol, the process moves to step S330-10, and if it is not the small hitting special symbol, the process moves to step S330-14.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a prepares to set the special figure special power process data to “5” and transfer the process to the small hitting game process, and performs the small hitting start preparation setting process in step S330-11. Specifically, small hit game control data is specified.

  In step S330-12, main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command according to the type of big hit game or small hit game in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S330-13, the type of big hit game or small hit game The corresponding opening time is set to a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol stopping process of this time is ended. As a result, an opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the opening effect of the big hit game is performed.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a prepares to set the special figure special power process data to “0” and shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination process, and ends the current special symbol stop process.

(The jackpot game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot gaming process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot gaming process on the main control board 110.

  First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether an opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110 c is “0”. If the opening is currently in progress, the processing moves to step S340-2, and if the opening is not currently opening, the processing moves to step S340-6.

  At step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set at step S330-10 has elapsed. It is determined that the opening time has passed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-3. If the opening time has not elapsed, the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs jackpot start setting processing. Specifically, “1” is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110 c and stored. Here, since the round game has not been performed even once, the number of round games (R) becomes “1”.

  At step S340-4, main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening open process. Specifically, "1" is added to update the number of times of release (K) stored in the main RAM 110c. In addition, in order to open the 1st large winning a prize opening opening and closing member 51 or the 2nd large winning a prize opening opening and closing member 54, you set the energization data which energizes the 1st large winning a prize opening and closing solenoid 51b or the 2nd big winning opening and closing solenoid 54b. At the same time, the opening time of the first large winning opening 50 or the second large winning opening 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110 c based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K).

  At step S340-5, main CPU 110a performs round designation command transmission determination processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, a round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing round game effects according to the number of rounds is performed.

  At step S340-6, main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently in the process of ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to the processing after all the preset round games have ended. Therefore, if the current ending is in progress, the process moves to step S340-18, and if the current ending is not in progress, the process moves to step S340-7.

  At step S340-7, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is closing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the first large winning opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b is set. As a result, when it is determined that the special winning opening is closed, the process proceeds to step S340-8, and when it is determined that the special winning opening is not closing, the process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-8, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening set in step S340-10 described later has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the present big hit game processing is ended to maintain the closing of the large winning opening, and if the closing time has elapsed, the processing proceeds to step S340-4 to open the large winning opening. Transfer the process.

  At step S340-9, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the “opening completion condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, whether or not the number of big winning enter balls (C), which is the number of game balls entering the big winning opening, has reached a prescribed number (9), or once in the opening number (K) It is determined whether or not the open time per period has passed. If the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-10, and if the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the present jackpot gaming process is ended.

  At step S340-10, main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b to close the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 or the second large winning opening opening / closing member 54. Is cleared, and the closing time of the first large winning opening 50 or the second large winning opening 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of opening (K).

  At step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has ended. If one round game has ended, the process moves on to step S340-12, and if one round game has not ended, the current jackpot game process ends.

  At step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs round data initialization processing. Specifically, the number of opening times (K) stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and the number of big winning entrance balls (C) is cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

  At step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is the maximum value. If the number of round games (R) is the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S340-15. If the number of round games (R) is not the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c and stores it, and ends the present jackpot gaming process.

  In step S340-15, main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R) stored in main RAM 110c, and in step S340-16, sets an ending designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and step S340- At 17, the ending time according to the type of jackpot game is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the present jackpot game processing is ended. As a result, an ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a process for executing the ending effect is performed.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S340-17 has elapsed. When the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-19, it is prepared to set "4" to the special figure special power processing data and to shift to the big hit game ending processing, and when the ending time has not elapsed, this time End the jackpot game processing of.

(The jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the jackpot game end processing on the main control board 110.

  In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special view data and the winning state data stored in the main RAM 110c.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and performs processing of setting a high probability flag based on the stop special view data and the winning state data. For example, if the stop special view data is "02", a high probability flag is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S350-3, main CPU 110a refers to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and sets the high probability number (X) in a predetermined area of main RAM 110c based on the stop special view data and the winning state data. Do. For example, if the stop special figure data is "02", 50000 times are set as the high probability number (X).

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a refers to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and performs processing of whether or not to set the time-saving game flag based on the stop special view data and the winning state data. For example, when the stop special view data is "01", the time saving game flag is not set if the winning time status data is 00H, but the time saving game flag is set if the winning time status data is 01H or 02H.

  In step S350-5, main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and sets the time reduction number (J) in a predetermined area of main RAM 110c based on the stop special view data and the winning state data. . For example, when the stop special figure data is "01", if the winning state data is 00H, 0 times are set as the time reduction number (J), and if the winning state data is 01H or 02H, the time reduction number (J) Set as 100 times.

  In step S350-6, main CPU 110a sets a game state designating command corresponding to the game state according to the high probability flag and the time reduction game flag in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S350-7, performs special image processing. The data is set to 0 and preparation is made to shift to the special symbol storage determination processing, and the present jackpot gaming end processing is ended.

(Abnormality judgment processing of main control board)
The abnormality determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process (information program) in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S721, the main CPU 110a saves the gaming stack pointer to the information RWM area, sets the information stack pointer in step S722, and saves the register to the information RWM area in step S723.

  At step S724, main CPU 110a performs an incorrect winning error determination process. Specifically, when the game ball is winning in the second starting port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, and when the game ball is winning in the special winning opening when not in special games (big hit game, small hit game) An incorrect prize error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c on the assumption that an incorrect prize error has occurred. As a result, an incorrect prize error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing an incorrect prize error notification (display of an incorrect prize error image on the image display device, output of an incorrect prize error sound) is performed. It will be.

  At step S725, main CPU 110a performs abnormal winning error determination processing. Specifically, the number of gaming balls and winning balls that have been won in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 53) If the number of gaming balls discharged from the winning ball flow path to be dropped does not match, an abnormal winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c as an abnormal winning error occurred. As a result, an abnormal prize error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing an abnormal prize error notification (display of an abnormal prize error image on the image display device, output of an abnormal prize error sound) is performed. It will be.

  At step S726, main CPU 110a performs a magnetic error determination process. Specifically, when an abnormal magnetism is detected for a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 55a, a magnetic error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c as a magnetic error occurrence. Thereby, a magnetic error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for performing magnetic error notification (display of magnetic error image on the image display device, output of magnetic error sound) is performed.

  At step S 727, the main CPU 110 a performs radio wave error determination processing. Specifically, when an abnormal radio wave is detected over a predetermined period by the radio wave detection sensor 56a, a radio wave error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c as that on which the radio wave error has occurred. As a result, a radio wave error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for performing radio wave error notification (display of radio wave error image on image display device, output of radio wave error sound) is performed.

  At step S728, main CPU 110a performs door open error determination processing. Specifically, when the opening detection switch 31a is turned from the OFF state to the ON state, a door opening error start designation command is set as the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c as a door opening error occurred, and the opening detection switch 31a is turned off from the ON state. When the state is reached, a door open error end designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110 c on the assumption that the door open error is canceled. Thus, a door open error start designation command and a door open error end designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 130, and a door open error notification (display of a door open error image to the image display device, output of a door open error sound) Processing for execution will be performed.

  In step S729, the main CPU 110a performs an operation error determination process, and ends the current abnormality determination process. Specifically, an operation error occurred when the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the above-described initial setting process in step S10 is completed) An operation error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c as a command. As a result, an operation error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for performing operation error notification (display of operation error image on the image display device, output of operation error sound) is performed. The details of the operation error determination process will be described later.

  As described above, it is determined whether various errors (abnormality) have occurred while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the above-described initial setting process in step S10 is completed), and an error occurs. In this case, processing for causing an error notification is performed, so that security of the gaming machine 1 can be secured.

  In addition, by executing the abnormality determination process with the performance program, it is possible to advance the separation of the functions of the game program (a program related to game progression control) and the performance program (a program not related to game progression control) The program design can be facilitated, and it is possible to contribute to the creation of a more entertaining game program.

  In the abnormality determination process, the operation error determination process is performed to determine an incorrect operation of the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a. However, the operation error determination process may not be performed.

(Operation error judgment processing of main control board)
An operation error determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing operation error determination processing (performance program) in the main control board.

  First, in step S729-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting key switch 112a has been switched from the OFF state to the ON state. If it changes from the OFF state to the ON state, the process proceeds to step S 729-2 as a setting key error, which is one type of operation error, without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is turned off. If the state has not been turned on, the process moves to step S729-3.

  In step S729-2, the main CPU 110a sets a setting key error start designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. Thus, the setting key error start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for starting the setting key error notification is performed.

  In step S729-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting key switch 112a has been switched from the ON state to the OFF state. If the ON state is changed to the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S729-4 on the assumption that the setting key error is canceled, and if the ON state is not changed to the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S729-5. Move.

  In step S729-4, the main CPU 110a sets a setting key error end designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. Thus, a setting key error end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for ending the setting key error notification is performed.

  At step S729-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If it is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S 729-6 as there is a possibility of a clear switch error which is one of operation errors without shifting to the setting change mode or the RWM clear mode, and the process is not in the ON state. If (in the OFF state), the process proceeds to step S729-9.

  In step S729-6, the main CPU 110a updates the continuation counter for monitoring the period during which the RWM clear switch 111a is on continuously by +1, and in step S729-7, the continuation counter has a prescribed value (for example, 10). It is determined whether the If it is the prescribed value, the process proceeds to step S729-8 as a clear switch error has occurred, and if it is not the prescribed value, the current operation error determination process is ended. The continuation counter is set to the information RWM.

  In step S729-8, the main CPU 110a sets a clear switch error designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. Thus, the clear switch error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing clear switch error notification is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).

  In step S729-9, the main CPU 110a clears the continuation counter to 0 (initialization), and ends the current operation error determination process.

  As described above, while the progress control of the game is being performed (after the above-described initial setting process in step S10 is completed), the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a is monitored to perform the operation. In this case, since an operation error notification (setting key error notification, clear switch error notification) is performed, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation on the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a.

  In addition, while the progress control of the game is being performed, even if the setting key switch 112a is operated, there is no transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, so that the progress control of the game is not hindered, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the progression of the movement becomes unstable.

  In addition, while the progress control of the game is being performed, even if the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, there is no transition to the setting change mode or the RWM clear mode, so the progress control of the game is not inhibited, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the progression of the movement becomes unstable.

  When a setting key error occurs, the setting key error notification is performed until the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state. However, the setting key error may be continued until the power is turned off. In this way, it becomes easy to detect an unauthorized operation, and it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of an unauthorized action.

  Further, although the clear switch error notification is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) when the clear switch error occurs, the power may be continued until the power is turned off. In this way, it becomes easy to detect an unauthorized operation, and it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of an unauthorized action.

  In addition, while executing the setting key error notification and the clear switch error notification, it is set that the occurrence of the clear switch error is not determined and the RWM clear switch 111a is operated (turned from the OFF state to the ON state) The key error notification and the clear switch error notification may be ended.

  Further, although both of the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are to be monitored, an operation error notification may be performed with only one of them being to be monitored.

(Game ball counting process of main control board)
The game ball counting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process (information program) in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S741, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game mode is currently in play. If it is in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S742 to count the number of normal middle payouts which is the number of payouts in the normal gaming state, and if it is not in the normal gaming state, the number of normal middle payouts is not counted. As processing, the process moves to step S750.

  At step S742, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from general winning opening detection switch 43a. If the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that the gaming ball has not won in the general winning opening 43, and the process proceeds to step S744. If the detection signal is input, the gaming ball is displayed in the general winning opening 43. In step S743, "5" which is the number of payouts (the number of winning balls) corresponding to the general winning opening 43 is added to the normal number of middle payouts counter for counting the number of middle payouts. In addition, the normal payout number counter is set in the information RWM area.

  In step S744, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from first large winning opening detection switch 50a or second large winning opening detection switch 53a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the gaming ball has not won in the special winning opening, and the process proceeds to step S746. If the detection signal is input, the gaming ball is winning in the special winning opening In step S745, the number of payouts (number of winning balls) corresponding to the special winning opening is added to the normal middle payout number counter.

  In addition, the number of payouts (number of award balls) when the gaming ball has won in the first large winning opening 50 is set to 15, and the number of payouts when the gaming ball has won in the second large winning opening 53 (number of winning balls) The number of payouts corresponding to each special winning opening may be made different, such as ten. In that case, when the detection signal is input from the first large winning opening detection switch 50a, the number of payouts (the number of winning balls) corresponding to the first large winning opening 50 is usually made in the middle payout number counter. When the detection signal is input from the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, adding “10” which is the number of payouts (the number of winning balls) corresponding to the second large winning opening 53 to the normal middle payout number counter Good.

  In step S746, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from first starting opening detection switch 45a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the gaming ball has not won the first start opening 45, the process proceeds to step S748, and if the detection signal is input, the first start opening 45 is displayed. Assuming that the gaming ball has won, “3” which is the number of payouts (the number of winning balls) corresponding to the first starting opening 45 is added to the normal middle payout number counter in step S747.

  At step S748, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from second starting opening detection switch 47a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the gaming ball has not won in the second starting opening 47, the process proceeds to step S750, and if the detection signal is input, the second starting opening 47 is displayed. Assuming that the gaming ball has won, “2” which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the second starting opening 47 is added to the normal middle payout number counter in step S749.

  At step S750, main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from out-of-sphere detection switch 57a. When the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that there is no out ball which is the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area 5a, and the current game ball counting process is ended, and the detection signal is input, Assuming that there is an out ball, “1” is added to the total out number counter for counting the out ball (total out number) in all gaming states in step S751. The total out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

  At step S752, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game mode is currently in play. When not in the normal gaming state, the current game ball counting process is ended, and when in the normal gaming state, in step S753, to count the number of out in the normal gaming state (normal out number) “1” is added to the normal out number counter, and the current game ball counting process is ended. The normal middle out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

  As described above, while the progress control of the game is being performed without counting and storing the number of payouts and the number of outs before the progress control of the game is performed (the initial setting process of step S10 described above) After the initial setting process in step S10 is completed, the player can execute the game since the normal number of middle payouts, the number of middle outs and the total number of outs which are gaming information (history information) in the game are counted and stored. It becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) of the gaming machine at the time, and it becomes possible to use it for calculation of performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine.

  In addition, even when the game ball is won in the large winning opening by the small hitting game during the normal gaming state, "15" which is the number of payouts (the number of winning balls) corresponding to the large winning opening is added to the normal middle payout number counter. When the gaming ball is won in the large winning opening by the small hitting game during the normal gaming state, the number of payouts may not be added to the normal middle payout number counter.

(Performance information calculation process of main control board)
The process of calculating the performance information of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the process of calculating the performance information (information program) in the main control board 110.

  In the present embodiment, performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine is displayed by dividing the state where power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 into a plurality of gaming sections. Therefore, first, the game section will be described.

  The game section is divided by the total number of outs, and the total number of outs counted from the first power on or 0 clear (initialization) of the information RWM area due to data abnormality becomes 300. The first game section is the first game section, and after the first game section, the game section is switched every 60,000 total out numbers, and the second game section, the third game section, the fourth game section ... the fourth It becomes N game section.

  First, in step S 761, the main CPU 110 a determines whether or not the section counter for counting what number game section is the first game section value (0) indicating that it is the first game section. Do. If it is the first game section value, the process proceeds to step S762, assuming that the present is the first game section which is not the target of calculation of performance information, and if it is not the first game section value, the present is performance information The process moves to step S763 as a game section after the second game section to be calculated. The section counter is set in the information RWM area.

  In step S762, the main CPU 110a determines whether the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total out number counter is equal to or more than the first section update value (300). If it is equal to or more than the first section update value, the processing is transferred to step S768 to update the game section, and if it is not equal to or more than the first section update value, the game section is not updated, the current performance information The calculation process ends.

  In step S 763, main CPU 110 a uses the normal number of middle payouts in the current game section indicated by the normal middle payout number counter, and the normal middle out number in the current gaming section indicated by the normal middle number counter as a normal basis as performance information. The value is calculated and the first decimal place is rounded off, and in step S764, the rounded base value is saved in the first area of the base storage area set in the information RWM area.

  The “normal base value” refers to the amount of gaming value used for the game during the normal gaming state (the number of outs, which is the number of gaming balls shot to the gaming area or ejected from the gaming area) during the normal gaming state It is a ratio (ratio) of the game value amount (the number of payouts which is the number of game balls which will be paid out to the player) which is to be awarded in the game, “(the number of payouts in the normal gaming state) The number of middle payouts 式 the number of outs in the normal gaming state is calculated according to a formula of “normal number of outs) × 100”.

  The "base storage area" is a storage area for storing the normal base value in the four game sections, and a first area for storing the normal base value in the current game section, and one time before In order to store a second area for storing a normal base value in a game section, a third area for storing a normal base value in a game area two times earlier, and a normal base value in a game area three times earlier And the fourth region of

  In step S765, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total out number counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If it is equal to or more than the second section update value, the processing is transferred to step S766 to update the game section, and if it is not equal to or more than the second section update value, it is determined that the game section is not updated. The calculation process ends.

  In addition, although the total out number is divided into the game section after the 2nd game section with 60,000, this number of 60,000 is about 1 day in the game machine which fires 100 game balls in 1 minute It is a number that can secure the working portion of Therefore, the game section is updated when the gaming machine is operated approximately all day.

  At step S766, main CPU 110a downshifts the contents of the first to third areas of the base storage area one by one, and clears the first area of the base storage area to 0 at step S767. Thus, the normal base value stored in each area is stored as the normal base value in the immediately preceding game section, and the normal base value in the current game section is reset to prepare for transition to the next game section. It will be.

  In step S768, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the section counter to update the game section, and in step S769, the total out number indicated by the total out number counter, and the normal middle payout indicated by the normal middle payout number counter. The number and the normal out number indicated by the normal out number counter are cleared to 0, the processing for shifting to the next game section is performed, and the performance information calculation processing of this time is ended.

  As described above, updating the game section by the total number of outs allows the presence of a state in which different set values are set in one game section. Therefore, it is possible to obtain (store) game information (total number of outs, number of regular outs, number of regular middle payouts, etc.) straddling a plurality of set values in one game section, and it is obstructed by setting change It is possible to calculate performance information (usually a base value) without having to

  In addition, since a base value (one type of history information) is calculated and stored from the number of normal outs and the number of average out payouts for each gaming section as performance information for each gaming section, It becomes possible to provide information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance appropriately.

  In addition, the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected even if you change the set value (it has no relation to the set value), so it is the game information. It is possible to calculate, store and display performance information (usually a base value) from which the influence of the above has been eliminated, and it is possible to use it to grasp the performance of the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, in the first game section, the normal base value is not calculated, so that the operation check in the inspection before shipment of the gaming machine (the operation check of the detection switch for various winning openings and the ball out detection switch by firing and maintenance of gaming balls) It is not possible to provide low reliability information affected by the above, and it is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that the actual performance of the gaming machine is misunderstood.

  In addition, by calculating the normal base value after the second game section, it is possible to display the normal base value with high credibility excluding the influence of the inspection before shipment of the gaming machine, and the actual performance of the gaming machine It becomes possible to provide highly reliable information for accurate grasping.

  Although the base value is normally calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area every time the performance information calculation process is executed (every 4 milliseconds), the normal base value in the current game section is Every time (at every 20 seconds) when the time is displayed on the information display unit 113, a normal base value in the current game section may be calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area.

  In the first game section, although the normal middle payout number and the middle middle out number are counted although the base value is not usually calculated, the middle middle payout number and the middle middle out number are not counted. You may

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The process of setting the performance display data of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the performance display data (information program) in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S771, the main CPU 110a determines whether the display switching time counter for determining whether to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is the display switching value (0). If it is the display switching value, the process proceeds to step S772 as switching the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113. If it is not the display switching value, the information display 113 is displayed. The processing moves to step S776 on the assumption that the performance information is not switched. In addition, when this processing is first executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the value of the display switching time counter is “0” which is the display switching value. Further, the display switching time counter is set in the information RWM area.

  In step S772, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmation completed flag for determining whether the lighting confirmation of the information display device 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmation completed flag is saved, the process proceeds to step S774 to display the normal base value on the information display 113. If the lighting confirmation completed flag is not saved, the information display 113 is performed. The process moves to step S773 to confirm that the lamp is lit. In the case where this processing is first executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the lighting confirmation completed flag is not saved.

  In step 773, the main CPU 110 a turns on display data for lighting confirmation for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113 a to 113 d) constituting the information display 113. Then, the process proceeds to step S776.

  In step S774, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is “0”, the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is “1”, the base storage Acquire the normal base value saved in the second area of the area, and if the data selection counter value is “2”, acquire the ordinary base value saved in the third area of the base storage area, and select the data If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired. The data selection counter value is updated in step S782 described later.

  In step S775, main CPU 110a refers to the display data determination table (not shown), and based on the section counter value, the normal medium out number indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the information display 113 based on the obtained normal base value. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on is determined, and the process proceeds to step S776.

  In step S 776, main CPU 110 a sets the determined display data as display information of information display 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. Thus, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process (game program) in step S800 described above is referred to, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is information It will be displayed on the display 113. The display information of the information display unit 113 in each game section will be described later.

  In step S777, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above, and in step S778 determines whether the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S 785 noting that the time for switching the display of the information display device 113 has not elapsed, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, it is displayed on the information display device 113. In step S779, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized), assuming that the time for switching the performance information has elapsed.

  At step S780, main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above lighting confirmation completed flag is present in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmation completed flag is present, the process proceeds to step S 782. If the lighting confirmation completed flag is not present, the lighting confirmation completed flag is saved in the information RWM area in step S 781 and the process proceeds to step S 785. .

  In step S782, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the data selection counter described above, and in step S783, determines whether the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S785. If it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialized) in step S784, and the process proceeds to step S785.

  In step S785, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area in step S723 described above. In step S786, the main CPU 110a restores the gaming stack pointer saved in the information RWM area in step S721. End the display data setting process.

  As described above, all segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 light up (the lighting confirmation is performed after the game machine 1 is powered on and before displaying performance information (normal base value)). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display unit 113 is broken or which segment is broken.

  Also, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of four gaming sections consisting of the current gaming section and the past three gaming sections is displayed in order, so the latest 4 The performance information (normal base value) in one game section can be compared, and it becomes possible to confirm the actual performance of the gaming machine and to grasp the possibility that fraudulent activity has taken place.

(Display information of the information display in each game section)
Next, display information of the information display unit 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. In the table of display information in FIG. 41, a section counter value (type of game section), a number of out during normal, a data selection counter value, and display contents of the information display 113 are associated.

  As identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113, "bL." Indicating that it is the normal base value of the current gaming section, "indicates that it is the normal base value of the game segment of the previous time There are b1. "," b2. "which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game segment of 2 times before, and" b3. "which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game segment of 3 times before.

  The numerical information displayed on the numerical value segment of the information display 113 includes "-", which indicates that there is no calculated normal base value, and the normal base value is "0" or the number of medium outs is "0". Indicating that the number of medium outs is usually “1” or more and “01” to “99” indicating that the base value is usually “1” to “99”, and the base value is “00”. There is "99." which shows that it is "100" or more. When the base value is usually less than "10", the tens place of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

  And about the numerical information displayed on the numerical segment, the display mode does not change (it is displayed lit) regardless of the game section or the number of out during normal, but about the identification information displayed on the identification segment, the game area or The display mode is changed (flickered display or lighted display) according to the number of normal outs and the like (presence or absence of the calculated normal base value and presence or absence of the reliability of the calculated normal base value).

  Specifically, in the first to fourth gaming sections, when the identification information of the gaming section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the period during which the credibility of the calculated normal base value is low (normal out number is In the case of 0 to 5999), identification information will be displayed blinking. Otherwise, the identification information is lit and displayed.

  Here, if an example is shown about a display of the information indicator 113, a section counter value is "1", the number of medium out is usually in the range of 0-5999, and a data selection counter value is "0". If the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is displayed flickering on the identification segment of the information display unit 113, and "35" is displayed on the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

  Thus, while the normal base value is "99" or less, performance information not using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "00" to "99" is displayed in the numerical segment while the normal base is When the value is "100" or more, performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of "99." of "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, which makes it easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. .

  Also, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01" etc.). It is possible to effectively use two 7-segment displays to make the display easy to understand.

  Also, in the case of displaying the normal base value of the current game section, when the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999 that has not reached a sufficient quantity to calculate the normal base value. Since the identification information “bL.” Displayed on the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner, it becomes easy to grasp that the normal base value currently displayed is information with low credibility.

  In addition, when there is no calculated normal base value, "--" which is not a numerical value is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment Makes it easy to understand

  The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as the information program, but any one or two are executed as the game program (for example, game ball counting) The process may be executed in an input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

  Further, processing for outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by a performance program instead of being executed in the output control processing which is a game program.

  In addition, the game ball which has won in the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50 and the second large winning opening 53 by the out ball detection switch 57a, and the out opening 39 Instead of detecting the out ball consisting of the game balls having flowed into, only the game balls having flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 57a. In that case, the outside ball detection switch 57a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first large winning opening detection switch 50a, the second large winning opening detection switch The number of outs (total number of outs, number of normal outs) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected in 53a.

(Display example of the information display)
Next, display examples 1 to 7 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Display example 1 of the information display)
A display example 1 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a display example when setting change is performed at the time of first power-on.

  First, when the power is turned on for the first time (power is turned on), the main control board 110 is in an initial control which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting change operation has not been performed, error information “Er.FF” indicating a non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113 as a non-recoverable error due to a checksum error, and the power supply The display of error information continues until the OFF state.

  On the other hand, when the setting change operation is being performed, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the provisional setting value "1" is displayed on the information display 113, and the information display is displayed every time the setting value update operation is performed. The setting value displayed on the screen 113 is updated as “1” → “2” → “3”. When the setting value fixing operation is performed in that state, the setting value “3” displayed on the information display 113 immediately before is determined and saved in the setting value area of the gaming RWM and displayed on the information display 113 The setting value "3" is erased, and the setting change mode ends.

  Thereafter, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started, and normal control under which the progress control of the game is performed is performed. At this time, lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, and all segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) light up, and this state continues for 5 seconds. .

  As described above, when displaying the setting value on the information display 113, the setting value is displayed because the setting value is displayed on the numerical value segment of the information display 113 as in the case of displaying the numerical value of the normal base value. It becomes possible to make it easy to recognize.

  Also, when displaying a setting value consisting of a single digit number, unlike displaying a base value numerical value, the base digit numerical value is displayed because it is displayed without adding "0" to the tens place. It becomes difficult to be confused, and it becomes possible to make it easy to recognize that it is the display of the setting value.

  Also, when the setting change operation is not performed at the first power-on (the setting value is not saved), the error information of the unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so the setting value is set. It is possible to make it easy to recognize what needs to be done.

  When the set value is displayed, it is not displayed on the 7-segment display 113d indicating the 1's digit of the numerical value segment, but on any one of the other 7-segment displays 113a to 113c of the information display 113. The setting values may be displayed or may be displayed on two or more seven-segment displays of the information display 113.

  Further, when displaying the setting value, identification information (for example, “St.”) indicating that the setting value is set may be displayed on the identification segment, and the setting value may be displayed on the numerical segment. In that case, the setting value may be displayed at the first place of the numerical value segment, or the setting value may be displayed at the tens place.

  In addition, the special symbol display and the normal symbol display that can be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1 instead of displaying the set value only on the information display 113 are configured with a 7-segment display, and the special symbol display is displayed. The set value may be displayed on either the container or the normal symbol display.

(Display example 2 of the information display)
A display example 2 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a display example when RWM clear is performed when the power is turned on (power is turned on again).

  First, when there is power ON (power supply), the main control board 110 is in an initial control which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, when the RWM clear operation is performed, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode, but the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is not the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4) The error information “Er.FF” indicating an unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113 as a non-recoverable error due to a set value abnormality, and the display of the error information continues until the power is turned off. .

  On the other hand, when the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4), the clear confirmation operation is in a standby state, and the information display unit 113 is set Also, the RWM clear mode is ended when the clear confirmation operation is performed.

  Thereafter, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started, and normal control under which the progress control of the game is performed is performed. At this time, lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, and all segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) light up, and this state continues for 5 seconds. .

  As described above, in the RWM clear mode in which the setting value is normal, no information (for example, the setting value or performance information) is displayed on the information display unit 113. Even if this is done, it is possible to improve the security of the gaming machine without leaking information that the gaming shop wants to conceal.

  Further, when the set value is abnormal, since the error information of the non-returnable error is displayed on the information display 113, it is possible to easily recognize that the set value has to be set.

(Display example 3 of the information display)
Display Example 3 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a display example when setting confirmation is performed when the power is turned on (power on again).

  First, when the power is turned on (power is turned on again), the main control board 110 is in an initial control which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting confirmation operation is being performed, the processing shifts to the setting confirmation mode, but if the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is not the appropriate range (1 to 4) The error information "Er. FF" indicating an unrecoverable error is displayed on the information display 113 as a non-recoverable error due to a set value abnormality, and the display of the error information continues until the power is turned off.

  On the other hand, when the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is the appropriate range (1 to 4), the current setting value (“1” in this case) is displayed on the information display 113. When the confirmation termination operation is performed, the setting value “1” displayed on the information display 113 is erased, and the setting confirmation mode is terminated.

  Thereafter, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started, and normal control under which the progress control of the game is performed is performed. At this time, lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started, and all segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) light up, and this state continues for 5 seconds. .

  As described above, when the setting value is abnormal, since the error information of the non-returnable error is displayed on the information display 113, it is possible to easily recognize that the setting value has to be set. .

(Display example 4 of the information display)
A display example 4 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a display example in the case where the game transition control is started and the first game section is started.

  When progress control of the game is started and normal control is in progress, lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is started and all segments (including decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) light up. This condition will continue for 5 seconds.

  Thereafter, when the lighting confirmation is completed, the normal base value in the current game section is displayed on the information display unit 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is blinked and displayed in the identification segment, and "-" indicating that the calculated normal base value does not exist in the numeric segment. Lights up.

  In addition, the blinking display of the identification segment when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode is a blinking display of a 0.6 second cycle in which the lighting of 0.3 seconds and the turning off of 0.3 seconds are repeated, The same applies to the blinking display of the identification segment appearing in the following description.

  After that, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the previous game section in the blinking display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Indicating that it is a game section one time ago is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numerical segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Furthermore, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time elapses, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the game section of the second previous time in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicating that it is a game section two times before is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numeric segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  After that, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b3." Indicating that it is a game section three times before is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numerical segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Thereafter, until the total number of outs from the start of the first game section becomes 300 and the first game section ends, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the third game section is displayed Each time 5 seconds, which is the switching time, elapses, switching is sequentially performed.

  In this way, before displaying the normal base value in each game section in order, since lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is performed over a predetermined period (5 seconds), each segment of the information display 113 is broken? It is possible to check whether or not it is not possible, and it is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that the numerical value when the base value is normally displayed is misidentified.

  Further, since the time for lighting confirmation and the time for displaying the normal base value in each game section are the same, it becomes possible to easily recognize as an idling period before displaying the normal base value.

  In addition, since there is no normal base value to be calculated in the first game section and the normal base value is not displayed, it is thereafter (after the second game section) as compared to the case where a normal base value with low credibility is displayed. It is possible to improve the reliability of the displayed normal base value.

  In addition, for the display of a plurality of game sections without the calculated normal base value, "-" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value is displayed in common in the numerical segment of the information display unit 113. , It can be easily recognized that there is no calculated normal base value.

(Display example 5 of the information display)
A display example 5 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a display example in the case of switching from the first gaming section to the second gaming section.

  First, in the first game section, the normal base value in the game section of the second previous time is displayed on the information display unit 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicating that it is a game section two times before is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numeric segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  After that, if the total number of outs in the first gaming section reaches 300 before 5 seconds which is the display switching time elapses, the first gaming section ends and the second gaming section starts, but with the display switching time The display of the normal base value until then continues until a certain 5 seconds have elapsed.

  Then, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b3." Indicating that it is a game section three times before is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numerical segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Furthermore, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display unit 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and the calculated normal base value "23" is displayed on the numerical segment. Ru.

  After that, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the previous game section in the blinking display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Indicating that it is a game section one time ago is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numerical segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Then, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the previous game section in the blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicating that it is a game section two times before is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numeric segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Thereafter, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section reaches 6000 or more, the display period is 5 seconds, which is the display period of the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section It will switch in order each time it passes.

  Thus, even if the game section is switched when displaying the normal base value of the predetermined game section, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses. The display of the base value does not end halfway due to the switching of the game section, and it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that it becomes difficult to recognize the base value.

  In addition, even if the game section is switched, it does not start from the display of the normal base value of the current game section, but is designed to take over the display order up to that point (for example, the normal base of the previous game section) If the game section is switched during display of the value, then the normal base value displayed next becomes the normal base value of the game section three times before), so by switching of the game section, the normal base value of each game section It becomes possible to make it easy to recognize the normal base value of each game section without the display order changing suddenly.

(Display example 6 of the information display)
A display example 6 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a display example in the case where the display mode of the normal base value of the current game section is switched during the second game section.

  First, in the second gaming section, the normal base value in the current gaming section (here, the second gaming section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is blinked on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "36" is lit on the numerical segment Ru.

  After that, when the total number of outs in the second game section reaches 6000 or more before 5 seconds which is the display switching time elapses, it becomes possible to calculate the highly reliable normal base value, and the display mode of the normal base value is displayed. Although the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the normal base value is displayed in the flickering display mode up to that time until 5 seconds which is the display switching time elapses.

  After that, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Indicating that it is a game section one time ago is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numerical segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Then, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the second previous game section (here, before the generation of the game section) in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicating that it is a game section two times before is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numeric segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Furthermore, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the third previous game section (here, before the generation of the game section) in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the fourth identification information "b3." Indicating that it is a game section three times before is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numerical segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  After that, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) in the lighting display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is displayed on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "36" is displayed on the numeric segment. Ru.

  Thereafter, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the third game section is switched to display until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section becomes 60000 and becomes the third game section. It will switch in order every time 5 seconds which is time passes.

  As described above, when it becomes possible to display the credible normal base value, the display mode of the target normal base value (the display mode of the identification information displayed on the identification segment) can be switched. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize whether it is a credible normal base value or a nonreliable normal base value.

  In addition, when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, the blinking display mode is continued until the display switching time elapses even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied. Therefore, the same normal base value is not displayed in a plurality of display modes during the display switching time, and it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to recognize the normal base value.

(Display example 7 of the information display)
A display example 7 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a display example in the case of switching from the second gaming section to the third gaming section.

  First, in the second game section, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display unit 113 in the lighting display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is displayed on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "36" is displayed on the numeric segment. Ru.

  After that, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Indicating that it is a game section one time ago is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numerical segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Then, if the total number of outs in the second game section reaches 60000 before 5 seconds which is the display switching time elapses, the second game section ends and the third game section starts and the normal base in each game section Although the condition for switching the display of the value is satisfied, the display of the normal base value up to that time is continued until 5 seconds which is the display switching time elapses.

  Furthermore, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the second previous game section (here, the first game section) in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the third identification information "b2." Indicating that it is a game section two times before is displayed blinking in the identification segment, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numeric segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  After that, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the fourth identification information "b3." Indicating that it is a game section three times before is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and it is indicated that there is no calculated normal base value in the numerical segment. "-" Is displayed on the display.

  Then, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the third game section) is displayed on the information display unit 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is displayed on the identification segment in a blinking manner, and the calculated normal base value "08" is displayed on the numerical segment. Ru.

  Furthermore, when 5 seconds which is the display switching time has elapsed, the information base 113 displays the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the second game section) in the lighting display mode. Specifically, the second identification information "b1." Indicating that it is a game section of the previous time is lit on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value "36" is illuminated on the numerical segment Is displayed.

  Thereafter, until the total number of outs from the start of the third gaming section reaches 6000 or more, the display switching time is 5 seconds, which is the display time of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current gaming section to the previous three gaming sections. It will switch in order each time it passes.

  In this way, when displaying the normal base value of the game section where there is no possibility that the calculation result of the normal base value changes, the display mode is the same as the display mode in the case of displaying the credible normal base value. In order to display, it is possible to easily recognize that there is no possibility that the calculation result of the base value will change.

  In the present embodiment, the first game section is up to a total of 300 outs, but if the value is less than 60,000, which is the total number of outs after the second game section, then 300 It may be more or less. Also, the total number of outs after the second game section may be more or less than 60,000.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the information RWM area is cleared to 0 (initialized) due to a data abnormality, the process is started again from the first game section, but it is assumed that there is no first game section. It may be made to start from 2 game sections.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the game section is switched during display of the predetermined normal base value, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses. Although the display order is also taken over, it may be started from the display of the normal base value of the current gaming section when the gaming section is switched, or after the display switching time has elapsed It may start from the display of the normal base value.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the blinking occurs until the display switching time elapses. Although the display mode is continued, it may be switched to the lighting display mode immediately when the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal base value in each game section is sequentially displayed without an interval period (non-display period), but is sequentially displayed across an interval period of a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is always performed after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (when the progression control of the game becomes possible). However, the lighting confirmation may not be performed after at least one of the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing for causing the information display 113 to display the setting value, and the setting change processing and the setting may be performed. When the confirmation process is performed, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is performed after powering on the gaming machine 1 and before displaying the performance information (normal base value) (at the time when the progression control of the game becomes possible). However, when setting change processing or setting confirmation processing is performed, lighting confirmation may be performed before setting values are displayed during execution of the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on for the first time (the set value is not saved) or when the set value saved at the time of the power on after the second time is abnormal, the error information can not be recovered. However, the error information displayed on the information display 113 may be different between the former case and the latter case.

(Main processing of payout control unit)
The main processing of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing main processing in the payout control unit 121. This main processing is performed by inputting to the payout CPU 121 a a system reset that occurs when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply substrate 160.

  First, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts in step H1, performs initialization of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step H2, and permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c in step H3.

  The payout CPU 121a initializes (0 clears) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the payout RAM 121c in step H4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H5. The CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and in step H6, all interrupts are permitted.

  At step H7, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power off designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the time of power interruption is received. If the power-off designation command is received, the process proceeds to step H8. If the power-off designation command is not received, the process of step H7 is repeatedly performed.

  In step H8, the payout CPU 121a sets interrupt prohibition to inhibit timer interruption, and in step H9 loads the number of unpaid game balls whose payout has not been completed from the payout counter of the payout RAM 121c, and in step H10. The command for specifying the number of remaining payouts according to the number of unpaid bills loaded is transmitted to the main control board 110.

  In step H11, the payout CPU 121a clears the output port to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.), and in step H12 prohibits RWM access, and thereafter the power supply is completely cut off. Wait up to.

(Timer interrupt processing of the payout control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the payout control unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the payout control unit. The timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the payout control unit 121 every predetermined period (4 milliseconds).

  First, the payout CPU 121a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the payout RWM area in step H100, and performs timer update processing in step H200. Specifically, the driving time of the payout motor 95b And performs processing of updating various timer counters such as an interval time provided after the game balls are paid out.

  In step H300, the payout CPU 121a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, processing of analyzing a command (sent from the main control board 110) stored in the reception buffer of the payout RWM area is performed.

  At step H400, the payout CPU 121a performs an input control process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there are inputs to various switches such as the open detection switch 31a, the dispensed ball detection switch 95a, the full detection switch 32a, the ball presence detection switch 96a, the rental button detection switch, and the return button detection switch. If there is an input, processing such as setting predetermined data is performed.

  In step H500, the payout CPU 121a performs a winning ball control process. Specifically, processing for paying out game balls for the number of payouts corresponding to the number-of-payouts designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 from the payout device 95 is performed.

  At step H600, the payout CPU 121a performs ball lending control processing. Specifically, when the lending button 20a is operated, one unit of gaming balls equivalent to 100 yen is performed while performing ball lending communication with a ball lending machine (not shown) juxtaposed to the gaming machine 1 As a processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 is performed.

  In step H700, the payout CPU 121a performs a release permission control process. Specifically, based on the reception of the release permission designation command from the main control board 110, the release permission flag is saved in the release permission flag area set in the work area of the payout RAM 121c. In addition, it is determined whether the launch permission flag is saved and the launch permission condition that is normally connected to a lending device (a so-called ball rental machine) provided in parallel to the gaming machine 1 is established. A process of permitting the launch control unit 122 to launch the game ball when the launch permission condition is established, and prohibiting the launch control unit 122 to launch the game ball when the launch permission condition is not established. I do.

  At step H750, the payout CPU 121a performs abnormality determination processing. Specifically, based on input signals from the fullness detection switch 32a and the ball presence detection switch 96a, the occurrence of a dish full error, a ball shortage error, etc. is judged, and a dish full error designation command, a ball shortage error designation command, etc. Processing for transmitting to the effect control board 130.

  At step H800, the payout CPU 121a performs data creation processing. Specifically, external output data output from the game information output terminal board 90 (a winning ball scheduled signal which is output for one pulse each time a condition for paying out ten gaming balls is satisfied, ten gaming balls) A data creation process is performed to create data such as driving data for driving the payout motor 95b) and a payout ball payout signal which is output for one pulse each time payout is made.

  At step H900, the payout CPU 121a performs output control processing. Specifically, a process of outputting signals such as external output data and drive data created in step H800, and a process of outputting various commands set in step H750 to the effect control board 130 are performed. In addition, instead of sending a command directly from the payout control unit 121 to the effect control board 130, the command is sent from the payout control unit 121 to the main control board 110, and this command is sent from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. It may be done.

  In step H1000, the payout CPU 121a restores the information saved in step H100 to the register of the payout CPU 121a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

  As described above, when the payout control unit 121 receives the launch permission designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 and is normally connected to the lending device provided in parallel to the gaming machine 1, the launch control is performed. In order to allow the game ball to be released to the part 122, the main control board 110 is not performing the game progress control (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, setting confirmation mode) Even if it is, it is possible to launch the game ball by the launch device 26.

  Further, since the payout control unit 121 executes the winning ball control processing and the ball lending control processing regardless of the control state of the main control board 110, the initial setting processing of the main control board 110 not performing the game progress control Even during execution (for example, in the setting change mode, in the RWM clear mode, in the setting confirmation mode), it is possible to pay out the game ball.

  Specifically, since the payout of the winning balls is performed based on the reception of the number-of-payouts designation command from the main control board 110, the initial setting process in which the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game. During the practice of the game, it is practically impossible to pay out the balls.

  On the other hand, the payout of the rental balls is not performed based on the reception of the command from the main control board 110, but is performed according to the result of the lending communication with the lending device based on the player's operation of the lending button 20a. Since there is, even during the execution of the initial setting process in which the main control board 110 does not control the progression of the game, it is possible to pay out the rental balls.

  If the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game (during the execution of the initial setting process), the firing control unit 122 may prohibit the firing of the gaming ball. In this case, when the main control board 110 is performing game progression control (for example, after the end of the initial setting process, the payout control process of step S500 of the timer interrupt process), the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. It is preferable that the launch permission designation command be set to and that the launch permission designation command be transmitted to the payout control board 120 in the output control process of step S800.

  In addition, even if the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game (during the execution of the initial setting process), the payout of the game balls (at least one of the winning balls and the lent balls) may be prohibited. Good. In this case, the payout of the game ball is inhibited until the power on designation command or the power restoration designated command is received from the main control board 110, and the power on designation command or the power restoration designated command is received from the main control board 110, It is good to allow the payout of the game ball.

(Modified example of main process of payout control unit)
A modification of the main processing of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main processing of the payout control unit 121.

  In this modification, it is assumed that backup power is supplied to the payout RAM 121c, and when the number-of-payouts designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls in the payout RAM 121c. It is premised that the payout control board 120 performs processing on the payout of the winning balls based on the value of the ball number area. Therefore, even when the power supply cutoff designation command is received from the main control board 110, the remaining payout amount designation command is not transmitted to the main control board 110.

  First, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts in step H1a, initializes the CPU such as setting of the built-in register in step H2a, and permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c in step H3a.

  In step H4a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. If the backup flag is saved, the process proceeds to step H5a as power recovery, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process proceeds to step H7a as power on for the first time.

  The payout CPU 121a calculates checksums (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c in step H5a, and determines whether the checksum is normal in step H6a. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c matches the checksum calculated in step H5a. If the checksum is normal (no error in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step H8a. If the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process in step H7a , All RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is initialized (0 clear).

  The payout CPU 121a activates CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H8a, and permits all interrupts in step H9a.

  At step H10a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power supply recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. If the power supply recovery designation command has been received (i.e., the control state is restored before the power is turned off), the process proceeds to step H15a. If the power supply recovery designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step H11a.

  In step H11a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the power on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. If the power on designation command is received (does not restore the control state before power off), the process moves to step H12a, and if the power on designation command is not received, the process moves to step H15a.

  In step H12a, the payout CPU 121a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, and in step H13a clears the output port to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.), and in step H14a. Then, initialize (zero clear) an area other than the firing permission flag area of the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c (including the winning balls number area).

  At step H15a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether the power supply cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. If the power-off designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step H10a. If the power-off designation command is received, the process proceeds to step H16a.

  In step H16a, the payout CPU 121a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, and in step H17a clears the output port to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.), and in step H18a. Clear the launch permission flag saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c.

  In step H19a, the payout CPU 121a calculates checksums (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c in step H20, and saves the checksums in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. By doing this, it is possible to perform data abnormality determination of the RWM area by the checksum at the time of power on next time.

  At step H20a, the payout CPU 121a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is backed up (power is restored) in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c, and prohibits RWM access at step H21a. Process and wait until the power supply is completely turned off.

  As described above, even if the checksum is abnormal, unlike the main control board 110, all RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c can be initialized to execute the payout control of the gaming ball without executing the return impossible error processing. Although the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game in order to achieve a steady state, such a disadvantage that the player suffers a disadvantage without performing only the payout control of the gaming ball with the payout control board 120. Can be avoided.

  In addition, since the area other than the discharge permission flag area of the payout RAM 121c is initialized by receiving the power on designation command from the main control board 110, the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c (prize ball) is initialized when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized. (Including several areas) is also initialized, so that the control state of the main control board 110 and the control state of the payout control board 120 can be aligned, and the situation where the gaming machine performs an unexpected operation is avoided. Is possible.

  As in the case of the main RAM 110c, the payout RAM 121c controls a payout RWM area used as a work (working area) when executing a payout program for performing payout control such as payout of gaming balls, and information control such as error determination. If the information RWM area is used as a work (work area) when executing the information program to be executed, the RWM area for payout and the RWM for information are received when the power on designation command is received. Both areas will be initialized (0 cleared).

(Main processing of effect control unit)
The main processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of main processing in the effect control unit 130 m. The main processing is performed by inputting to the sub CPU 130 a a system reset that is generated when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply substrate 160.

  First, sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step E2, and permits access to the RWM area of sub RAM 130c in step E3.

  In step E4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. If the backup flag is saved, the process proceeds to step E5 as the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process proceeds to step E8 as the first power on.

  In step E5, the sub CPU 130a calculates checksums (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E6, determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c matches the checksum calculated in step E5. If the checksum is normal (no error in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step E7. If the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step E8. Transfer the process.

  In step E7, the sub CPU 130a initializes (resets) an area other than the history information area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power failure (power failure) is taken over even after the power is restored.

  At step E8, the sub CPU 130a initializes (resets) the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the gaming history information saved in the history information area before the power failure (power failure) is not taken over after the power is restored.

  The sub CPU 130a starts CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E9, permits all interrupts in step E10, and performs sub-random number update processing in step E11. I do. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random number values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c.

  In step E12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the power supply cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. If the power-off designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E13. If the power-off designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step E11.

  In step E13, the sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, and in step E14 clears the output port to stop the operation of various drive sources (motor, solenoid, etc.).

  In step E15, the sub CPU 130a calculates checksums (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the sub RAM 130 c, and saves the checksums in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130 c. By doing this, it is possible to perform data abnormality determination of the RWM area by the checksum at the time of power on next time.

  In step E16, the sub CPU 130a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area is backed up (power is restored) in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and prohibits RWM access in step E17. Wait until the power supply is completely turned off.

  As described above, unlike the payout control unit, since it is not determined to receive the power on designation command and to initialize all RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c, the setting change or the setting on the main control board 110 is not performed. Even when the RWM clear is executed, the game history information can be handed over, and the player can be provided with game history information for a long period of time.

  It should be noted that whether or not the power on designation command has been received is determined, and when the power on designation command is received, the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c may be initialized. Further, only the history information area may be initialized instead of the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing in the effect control unit 130 m. The timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the effect RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and performs timer update processing in step E200. Specifically, processing is performed to update various timer counters necessary for the execution of the effect.

  The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, processing for analyzing a command (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the effect RWM area is performed. The details of the command analysis process will be described later.

  At step E400, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol or the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is not executed. Based on the elapse of the waiting time, processing is performed to execute a customer waiting effect to boost the player's willingness to play the game.

  In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs effect input control processing. Specifically, based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the effective period during the variable effect, an operation advance notice effect is generated to expect the special game to be executed, or the special game is A process for determining whether or not to execute is performed, and processing is performed, and if in the customer waiting state, saving is performed in the sub RAM 130c based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the effective period. A process for displaying the currently played game history information on the image display device and initializing (resetting) the game history information saved in the sub RAM 130c is performed.

  In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing. Specifically, updating of the rendering mode (rendering stage) in which the rendering elements (background image, rendering image, rendering sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. It is determined whether conditions (change in gaming state, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP / SPSP reach effect where the result is lost, etc.) is established, and if the update condition is satisfied, a plurality of effect modes are provided. Perform processing to update to any of the modes.

  "Effect mode" is the effect mode A to C set in the low probability non-time game state, the effect mode D to E set in the low probability time short game state, and the effect mode set in the high probability time short game state F to G are provided. In addition, when it is controlled to low probability non-time game state at the time of power ON (for example, after setting change, after RWM clearing, after setting confirmation, etc.), the effect mode set first is always effect mode A When it is controlled to the low probability time short game state at the time of power ON, the effect mode which is first set is always the effect mode D, and when the power ON time is controlled to the high probability time short game state The presentation mode initially set is the presentation mode F.

  In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs a game history update process. Specifically, processing is performed to update the game history information saved in the sub RAM 130c in accordance with the progress of the game (variation effect, big hit game, small hit game execution).

  In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 is performed.

  In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the effect RWM area in step E100 described above, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis process of effect control unit)
The command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described using FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302. If a command has not been received, the present command analysis process is ended.

  In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is the setting change designation command, the process proceeds to step E303. If it is not the setting change designation command, the process proceeds to step E304.

  In step E303, the sub CPU 130a performs setting change notification processing. Specifically, processing for setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting change notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for executing setting change notification is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E304, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is the RWM clear designation command. If it is the RWM clear designation command, the process proceeds to step E305. If it is not the RWM clear designation command, the process proceeds to step E306.

  In step E305, the sub CPU 130a performs an RWM clear notification process. Specifically, a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the RWM clear preparation notification is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If it is the setting confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step E307. If it is not the setting confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step E308.

  In step E307, the sub CPU 130a performs setting confirmation notification processing. Specifically, processing for setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power on designation command or a power recovery designation command. If the command is the power on designation command or the power recovery designation command, the process proceeds to step E309, and if it is not the power on designation command or the power recovery designation command, the process proceeds to step E310.

  In step E309, the sub CPU 130a performs power on notification processing. Specifically, when the received command is a power on designation command, the notification designation command for executing the above-mentioned power on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the received command is a power recovery designated command. In the case of the above, the notification instruction command for executing the above-described power supply recovery notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing a power on notification or a power recovery notification is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not an error system designation command, the process proceeds to step E312.

  In "Error system specification command", non-returnable error specification command, incorrect prize error specification command, abnormal prize error specification command, magnetic error specification command, radio wave error specification command, door open error start specification command, door open error end specification Commands, operation error specification commands, etc. are included.

  In step E311, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process. Specifically, an error notification according to the type of the received error designation command (returnable error notification, incorrect prize error notification, abnormal prize error notification, magnetic error notification, radio error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification In order to execute, etc.), processing of setting a notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is a customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step E313. If it is not a customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step E314.

  In step E313, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect preparation processing. Specifically, a customer waiting effect waiting flag and a customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) before starting the customer waiting effect are set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, in the above-described customer waiting effect control process, the customer waiting effect waiting flag and the customer waiting time are referred to, and a process for executing the customer waiting effect is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a gaming state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E315. If it is not the game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E316.

  In step E315, the sub CPU 130a performs gaming state setting processing. Specifically, processing of updating the gaming state stored in the sub RAM 130c to the gaming state according to the gaming state designation command is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E316, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is the special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step E317. If it is not the special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step E318.

  In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a pending number update process. Specifically, processing for setting a rendering instruction command for increasing or decreasing the number of suspension icons displayed on the image display device by updating the number of special view reservations stored in sub RAM 130 c in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 130 c Do. As a result, a rendering instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for increasing or decreasing the pending icons displayed on the image display device is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a start opening winning combination designation command. If it is a starting opening winning combination designation command, the received starting opening winning combination designation command (special drawing scheduled fluctuation pattern) is set in a prefetch storage area to be described later of the sub RAM 130c, and the process then proceeds to step E319 to specify starting opening winning combination. If it is not a command, the process proceeds to step E320.

  The "prefetch storage area" is a first prefetch storage unit for sequentially storing prefetch information (such as a special map schedule fluctuation pattern) based on a first start opening prize designation command, and hold information based on a second start opening prize designation command. Are divided into a second prefetch storage unit for sequentially storing the first and second storage units (a 0th storage unit) for storing the prefetch information corresponding to the variable display (variation effect) being executed. The storage unit and the second prefetch storage unit are each divided into first to fourth storage units.

  The first to fourth storage units of the first prefetch storage unit respectively correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special view determination information suspension storage area described above, and receive the first starting opening prize designation command Then, the prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the first special map reservation number. The prefetching information stored in each storage unit is moved (shifted) to a storage unit where one number is smaller each time when the variation display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is performed.

  The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit respectively correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the second special view determination information suspension storage area described above, and receive the second starting opening prize designation command Then, the prefetching information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the second special map reservation number. The prefetching information stored in each storage unit is moved (shifted) to a storage unit having a smaller number each time the second special symbol variation display (variation presentation) is performed.

  The said memory | storage part (0th memory | storage part) respond | corresponds to the special drawing determination information execution memory | storage area mentioned above, and when the fluctuation display of a 1st special symbol is performed, the 1st memory | storage part of 1st read-ahead memory | storage part The prefetching information moving from (shift) is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the prefetching information moving (shifting) from the first storage unit of the second prefetching unit is stored Ru.

  In step E319, the sub CPU 130a performs pre-reading effect determination processing. Specifically, the jackpot game is expected to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of special symbol fluctuation displays (variation effects) (indicating the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed) Whether or not to execute pre-reading effect, and the type of pre-reading effect to be executed are determined, and in order to execute pre-reading effect, processing is performed to set a production instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the rendering instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for performing the pre-reading effect is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  As pre-reading effect, the icon change effect which displays the reservation icon which is displayed on the image display device and the icon in a special display mode different from the normal display mode, and a predetermined effect during one or more variable display (variation effect) There are pre-reading continuous notice production etc which are executed.

  In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is the special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not the special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E322.

  In step E321, the sub CPU 130a performs symbol data determination processing. Specifically, processing is performed to determine an effect pattern to be stopped and displayed on the image display device as a result of the fluctuation effect, that is, an arrangement (combination) of effect symbols to be stopped on a predetermined effective line. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E322, sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. If it is the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E323. If it is not the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E326.

  In step E323, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern specified by the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command and the fluctuation effect pattern determination table (not shown), the fluctuation is an effect aspect of the fluctuation effect executed by the effect device including the image display device A rendering pattern is determined, and a processing for setting a rendering instruction command for executing variation rendering in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the rendering instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for performing the variable rendering is performed.

  In step E324, the sub CPU 130a performs advance notice effect determination processing. Specifically, on the basis of the fluctuation effect pattern determined in step E323, the jackpot game is expected to be executed (indicating that there is a possibility that the jackpot game may be executed) the jackpot notice effect is executed Whether or not and the type of the jackpot notice effect to be executed is determined, and a process of setting a rendering instruction command for executing the jackpot notice effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the rendering instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for executing the jackpot advance presentation effect is performed.

  In step E325, the sub CPU 130a performs pre-reading effect execution processing. Specifically, processing is performed to set a rendering instruction command for starting the pre-reading effect determined in the pre-reading effect determining process of step E319 or changing the effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the rendering instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for performing the pre-reading effect is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E326, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol determination command. If it is the symbol determination command, the process proceeds to step E327. If it is not the symbol determination command, the process proceeds to step E328.

  In step E327, the sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing. Specifically, processing is performed to set a rendering instruction command for ending the variable rendering to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c by stopping and displaying the rendering symbol in the temporary stop state. As a result, the rendering instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process for ending the fluctuation rendering is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

  In step E328, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is the special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E329, and if it is not the special game system designation command, the current command analysis process is ended.

  The "special game system designation command" includes a jackpot opening designation command, a jackpot round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, a small jack opening designation command, a small jack ending designation command and the like.

  At step E329, the sub CPU 130a performs special game effect determination processing. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, the process of setting the presentation instruction command for executing the opening presentation by determining the opening presentation of the big hit game or the small hit game is performed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the round In the case of the designated command, the process of setting the effect indication command for determining the round effect of the round game and executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed, and in the case of the ending specification command, the jackpot game or A process is performed to determine an ending effect of the small hitting game and set an effect instructing command for executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the rendering instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

(Modified example of main processing of effect control unit)
A modification of the main processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of main processing in the effect control unit 130 m. In this modified example, it is assumed that the backup power is not supplied to the sub RAM 130c, and the gaming history information before the power failure is not taken over after the power is restored.

  First, sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts in step E1a, performs initialization of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step E2a, and permits access to the RWM area of sub RAM 130c in step E3a.

  In step E4a, sub CPU 130a initializes (clears 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of sub RAM 130c, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5a. The CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and in step E6a, all interrupts are permitted.

  In step E7a, the sub CPU 130a performs sub random number update processing. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random number values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Main processing of general control unit)
The main processing of the general control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing main processing of the overall control unit 141. The main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate 160 to the central CPU 141a.

  First, in step T1, the overall CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts, and in step T2, performs initial setting processing. Specifically, initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers, access permission to the general RAM 141 c, initialization (clearing 0) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141 c, CTC (counter timer circuit circuit for generating timer interrupt Is activated, and all interrupts are permitted in step T3.

  At step T4, the overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 with reference to the input signal from the changeover switch 22 which can be operated by the game clerk, the image display device (the first image display device 70, the first The adjustment of the light amount (value) of the backlight of the two-image display device 71) and the process for switching the adjustment mode relating to the adjustment of the volume and the light amount are performed. The details of the adjustment mode switching process will be described later.

  At step T5, the overall CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing. Specifically, based on detection signals (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a for detecting the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the voice output device 9 outputs Perform processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound. The details of the volume adjustment process will be described later.

  At step T6, the overall CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing. Specifically, based on detection signals (a lower button detection signal, an upper button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 operable by the player, the image display device (first image) A process for adjusting the light quantity (value) of the backlight of the display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

  The light amount of the LEDs provided in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 instead of adjusting only the light amount of the backlight of the image display device (the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) It may be adjusted together.

  At step T7, the overall CPU 141a performs eco mode control processing. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of the eco mode for reducing the power consumption by reducing the light amount of the backlight of the image display device (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71). .

  At step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether a rendering instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the rendering control unit 130m has been received. If the rendering instruction command or the notification instruction command is not received, the process proceeds to step T11. If the rendering instruction command or the notification instruction command is received, the process proceeds to step T9.

  At step T9, the overall CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing. Specifically, an animation pattern is determined from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received rendering instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141 c.

  At step T10, the overall CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process. Specifically, a sound pattern is determined from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received rendering instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set (set) in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141 c.

  At step T11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing for updating the display image of the image display device is set in the overall RAM 141c. If the frame switching flag is present, the process proceeds to step T12. If the frame switching flag is not present, the process proceeds to step T4.

  The frame switching flag is set in V blank interrupt processing of the general control unit 141 described later. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are performed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

  At step T12, the overall CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the overall RAM 141c, and performs scene update processing at step T13. Specifically, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 with reference to a scene switching counter, a weight frame counter and a frame counter which are updated by V blank interrupt processing described later. The process of updating the address of the sound scene is performed based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

  At step T14, the overall CPU 141a performs drawing control processing. Specifically, according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, it is composed of drawing control commands from display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address. A display list is generated, and the display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

  Thereby, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer and also displays the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer as the image display device A process of displaying on (the first image display device, the second image display device 71) is performed.

  At step T15, the overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing. Specifically, the voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and the voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI).

  As a result, in the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI), processing of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the voice output device 9 is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

(Command reception interrupt processing of general control unit)
The command reception interrupt process of the general control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 (a) is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the general control unit 141. FIG. The command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving various commands transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step T30, the overall CPU 141a performs command reception processing. Specifically, when a rendering instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m is received, processing is performed to store the receiving instruction command in the general purpose RAM 141c. When this process ends, the current command reception interrupt process ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of general control unit)
The V blank interrupt processing of the general control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 (b) is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the general control unit 141. The V blank interrupt process is executed each time the image control unit 145 (VDP) receives a V blank signal transmitted every one frame (approximately 33 milliseconds) after the effect image is completely displayed.

  First, in step T50, the overall CPU 141a performs counter update processing. Specifically, processing is performed to update various counters (scene switching counter, weight frame counter, frame counter, etc.) used in the above-mentioned animation control processing etc. by +1.

  At step T51, the overall CPU 141a performs frame buffer switching command processing. Specifically, it instructs the image control unit 145 (VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM. Thus, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become "the drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame" every time the V blank interrupt process is performed every 1/30 seconds (about 33 milliseconds). It will be switched alternately to the buffer.

  At step T52, the overall CPU 141a sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched to a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c, and ends the current V blank interrupt process. The frame switching flag is referred to in step T11 of the main process of the general control unit 141.

(Adjustment mode switching process of general control unit)
The adjustment mode switching process of the general control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the adjustment mode switching process of the overall control unit 141.

  First, at step T4-1, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the adjustment mode relating to the adjustment of the volume and the light amount has been set in the overall RAM 141c. If the adjustment mode has not been set (this process is executed first after the power is turned on), the process proceeds to step T4-3. If the adjustment mode has been set, the process proceeds to step T4-2. Move.

  At step T4-2, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not there has been a change in the state of the changeover switch 22. Specifically, the current state of the changeover switch 22 is compared with the previous state of the changeover switch 22 stored in the general RAM 141 c in step T4-5 described later. If there is a change in the state of the changeover switch 22, the process proceeds to step T4-3 to set the adjustment mode. If there is no change in the state of the changeover switch 22, the adjustment mode is not set. The present adjustment mode switching process is terminated.

  At step T4-3, the overall CPU 141a selects the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59B, and at step T4-4, an adjustment mode (modes 1 to 16) corresponding to the switch position of the changeover switch 22; The information and the power saving mode (ON, OFF) are specified and set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141 c. The reference information indicates whether the volume adjustment of the effect sound can be performed using the cross key 19, the adjustment range of the volume value in the volume adjustment, the initial value of the volume value of the effect sound, and the backlight of the image display device using the arrow key 19. The adjustment range of the light amount value in the light amount adjustment, and the initial value of the light amount value of the backlight.

  At step T4-5, the overall CPU 141a sets the current state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c, and ends the current adjustment mode switching process. The state of the changeover switch 22 set here is referred to in step T4-2.

(Changeover switch and adjustment mode selection table)
The changeover switch 22 and the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 (a) is a view showing an appearance of the changeover switch 22, and FIG. 59 (b) is a view showing an adjustment mode selection table.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the changeover switch 22 is pivotally supported (360 degrees) rotatably with respect to the switch body 22a having a plurality of (for example, 16) selection terminals inside and the switch body 22a. Non-shorting type rotary switch having the operation unit 22b, and the selection terminal connected to the common terminal of the operation unit 22b is changed by rotating the operation unit 22b and the switch is switched (switch position is changed Is supposed to).

  Further, on the top surface of the switch body 22a, 16 divisions (0 to F) indicating the position (contact point) of the selection terminal to which the common terminal is connected are provided, and the common terminal is connected to the operation unit 22b. An arrow indicating the selection terminal is provided. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the state (switch position) of the switch by the scale of the switch body 22a and the arrow of the operation unit 22b.

  Note that the switch 22 may be configured as a slide switch that opens and closes a contact by the operation unit sliding linearly, or a dip switch or the like that changes the contact by operating any of a plurality of operation units. It may be configured by

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the adjustment mode selection table, switch positions (0 to F) of the changeover switch 22, adjustment modes (modes 1 to 16), reference information (volume adjustment availability, volume value adjustment) The range, the volume initial value, the light amount adjustment availability, the light amount adjustment range, the light amount initial value) and the setting of the power saving mode are associated with each other.

  For example, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is “1”, “mode 2” is set as the adjustment mode, “enabled (variable)” is set as the volume adjustment availability, and “1 to 2” is set as the volume value adjustment range. “5” is set, “1” is set as the volume initial value, “possible (variable)” is set as the light amount adjustment availability, “1 to 5” is set as the light amount value adjustment range, and “5” is set as the light amount initial value "1" is set and "OFF" is set as the power saving mode.

  As a first feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59 (b), in adjustment modes 1 to 6 in which the switch position of the changeover switch 22 falls within the range of 0 to 5, volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible (variable) In adjustment modes 7 to 11, the switch position is in the range of 6 to A, the volume adjustment is possible (variable) but the light amount adjustment is disabled (fixed), and the switch position is in the range of B to F In ~ 16, volume adjustment can not be performed (fixed) but light amount adjustment is possible (variable). By doing this, it is possible to select (set) whether or not the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment can be performed by the rough operation of the changeover switch 22, and the convenience when the gaming clerk operates can be improved.

  A second feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59 (b) is that the volume initial value and the light intensity initial value are set by switching the adjustment mode by the operation of the changeover switch 22. By doing this, it is possible to adjust the volume (value) and the light amount (value) also by the operation of the changeover switch 22, and it becomes possible to improve the convenience of the game clerk.

  As a third feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 and the adjustment modes 12 to 16, the setting of the power saving (eco) mode is set to OFF, and the adjustment modes 7 to 11 are The setting of the power saving (eco) mode is set to ON, and it is possible to set the power saving mode to ON / OFF by operating the changeover switch 22. By doing this, it is possible to set whether the power saving mode is turned on or off according to the intention of the game arcade side, and it becomes possible to control the power consumption of the gaming machine 1 to some extent. Therefore, it also becomes possible to adjust the operating cost of the whole game arcade.

(Circuit configuration of voice control unit)
The circuit configuration centering on the voice control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration centering on the voice control unit 148. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the voice control unit 148, a general control unit 141 for outputting various voice control commands related to voice output to the voice control unit 148, and compression of various voice data (rendering sound, system sound) An audio ROM 149 or the like stored as data is connected.

  The audio control unit 148 includes a control unit 148a for outputting output control commands (control commands for decoding unit, volume control commands, etc.) related to audio data and volume based on the audio control command transmitted from the general control unit 141; A mixer 148d for mixing and outputting a plurality of audio channels (ch0 to ch39) to which the output control command output from 148a is input, and audio signals output from each of the plurality of audio channels; Audio signal processing unit 148 e that performs predetermined audio processing (equalize, effect processing, pan, loop, etc.) on the received signal, an operational amplifier 148 f as an amplification device, and an audio signal that is a digital signal A D / A converter 148g for outputting to the audio output device 9 That.

  The plurality of audio channels are provided with a fixed channel group in which a plurality of fixed channels used for output of notification sound are set and a variable channel group in which a plurality of variable channels used for output of effect sound are set. , Decoding units 148b0 to 148b39 for performing processing (reading / expansion of audio data from the audio ROM 149, reproduction start, reproduction pause, reproduction end) according to the input control command for decoding unit, and an input volume control command A channel volume control unit is provided to perform processing (setting of output volume, fade-in, fade-out) according to.

  In the decoding section, "play status (playing, waiting)" indicating whether the voice is being played on the voice channel, "priority (high, middle) which is the priority of the voice being played on the voice channel" , Low), and status information such as "sound number" which is a number for specifying the audio to be reproduced / reproduced.

  In the channel volume control section, is "volume", which is the output amount (percentage to the maximum volume) of the audio currently reproduced on the audio channel, and fade in / fade out to the audio currently reproduced on the audio channel? Status information such as "fade status", which is information on whether or not they are completed, is included.

  Therefore, the control unit 148a can constantly grasp the processing status in these audio channels by periodically acquiring status information from the audio channel decoding unit and the channel volume control unit.

  The voice ROM 149 stores, as compressed digital data, a plurality of voice data (phrase data) such as background sound (BGM), sound effects, notification sound and the like used in the gaming machine. As a compression method of audio data, for example, a modified discrete cosine transform can be used, but it is not limited thereto, and the audio data may not be compressed.

(Configuration of audio channel)
The configuration of the audio channel of the audio control unit 148 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the configuration of the audio channel of the audio control unit 148. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61, among the plurality of audio channels (0ch to 39ch) included in the audio control unit 148, six audio channels of 0ch to 5ch are fixed channels that are fixed for use in notification sound. , Can not be used for the production sound. On the other hand, 34 audio channels of 6ch to 39ch are variable channels used for the effect sound, and when outputting the effect sound, the control unit 148a is an audio channel available from the audio channels of 6ch to 39ch. Are selected and used for reproduction of audio data instructed by the general control unit 141.

  As described above, since a plurality of audio channels are divided into a fixed channel for notification sound and a variable channel for effect sound, for example, serious (high priority) errors such as magnetic errors occur in the gaming machine 1 In this case, the notification sound can be easily output preferentially by muting or stopping the effect sound output from the variable channel. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of which channel is outputting the rendering sound, and it becomes possible to use the audio channel efficiently.

(Voice management table)
The voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a view showing a voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the voice management table contains the sound number of voice data, the type of voice data, the output format (stereo, monaural) of voice data, the priority of voice data, and the output volume of voice data. It is associated, and the description of the system sound is described as a reference.

The sound numbers “1” to “12” are notification sounds related to the security of the gaming machine 1, and the output format is “monaural” and the priority is set to one of “high”, “medium”, and “low”. There are ones that are output at a fixed volume (the MAX volume corresponding to volume value "5") and ones that are output depending on the volume value.
The sound numbers "13" to "100" are effect sounds relating to effects in the gaming machine 1, and the output format is "monaural" or "stereo" and the priority is set to "low", and all the volume Output at a volume dependent value.
The sound numbers "101" to "105" are notification sounds pertaining to the adjusted volume, the output format is "monaural", the priority is set to "low", and the volume is all dependent on the volume value It is output.

"Power on alarm sound" is an alarm sound (error sound) output over a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c (payout RAM 121c) is initialized (setting change, RWM clear) ).
The “power restoration alarming sound” is an alarming sound (error sound) which is output over a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is restored.
The “non-returnable error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) which is output until the power is turned off when a non-returnable error occurs in which the progress of the game is stopped on the main control board 110.
"Unauthorized winning error sound", the game ball is winning in the second starting opening 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or when the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is not in the game ball winning prize opening This is a notification sound (error sound) which is output until the power is turned off when an incorrect winning error such as an occurrence of an alarm occurs.
The "abnormal prize error sound" is output until the power is turned off when an abnormal prize error occurs in which the number of gaming balls that have won in the various winning openings and the number of gaming balls discharged from the winning ball flow path causing the winning balls to flow do not match. Notification sound (error sound).

The “magnetic error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) which is output over a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when a magnetic error for detecting an abnormal magnetic force occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 55 a.
The “radio wave error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) which is output over a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when a radio wave error for detecting an abnormal radio wave by the radio wave detection sensor 56 a occurs.
The “door open error sound” is an alarm sound (error sound) output over the open period when a door open error occurs that detects the opening of the game board attachment frame 3 or the glass frame 4 by the open detection switch 31a. It is.
The "setting key switch error sound" indicates that the setting key switch 112a is in the OFF state again when the setting key error in which the setting key switch 112a turns from the OFF state to the ON state occurs while the game progress control is being performed. The notification sound (error sound) is output until
"Clear switch error sound" is a notification that is output over a predetermined period (for example, one minute) when a clear switch error is generated while the RWM clear switch 111a is operated while game progress control is being performed. It is a sound (error sound).
"Dish full error sound" is output over the period when the game balls are full when a plate full error occurs to detect that the game balls are full on the lower plate 12 with the full detection switch 32a. Notification sound (error sound).
The “right-handed error sound” is a right-handed error in which the game ball is detected at the common view gate 44 or the second starting opening 47 in a period (for example, normal gaming state) Sometimes, it is a notification sound (error sound) output over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

  The alarm sound is set to have a priority according to the level of importance of the security abnormality (error), and the priority is set to be higher as the abnormality that leads to the fraudulent activity. Therefore, when a plurality of security anomalies with different priorities occur at the same time, control is performed so that only one notification sound with high priority can be heard. For example, when the door open error sound of the sound number "8" is output and the magnetic error of the sound number "6" occurs, the door open error sound of the sound number "8" is silenced to the inaudible sound ( Mute) to output a magnetic error sound. Then, stop the output of the magnetic error sound when the output period of the magnetic error sound passes, and return the volume of the door open error sound to the volume before muting if the output period of the door open error has not elapsed. It has become.

  Therefore, when the notification sound of the high priority sound number is output, the notification sound of the low priority sound number is not output even if the security abnormality (error) of the low priority sound number occurs. become. Further, when a security abnormality (error) having the same priority occurs, a notification sound corresponding to a security abnormality (error) generated later is output.

  In addition, while outputting audible sound of effect sound (such as BGM) or volume notification sound, the notification volume whose output volume is set to fixed volume (volume value "5") is "high" or "medium" notification sound When starting the output of the current volume value after saving the current volume value saved in the volume value region of the overall RAM 141c to the save region of the overall RAM 141c, the current volume value is the inaudible volume By setting the volume change command to “0” and outputting the volume change command to the voice control unit 148, a rendering sound (such as BGM) and a volume notification sound are output at the inaudible volume.

  In addition, while outputting in inaudible volume of effect sound (such as BGM) or volume notification sound, notification that the output volume is set to fixed volume (volume value "5") is "high" or "medium" notification When the output of the sound is finished, the volume value stored in the save area of the general RAM 141c is returned to the volume value area, and the volume change command is output to the voice control unit 148, whereby the rendering sound (BGM, etc.) And the volume notification sound is output at the original volume. By doing this, it becomes easy for the game clerk or player to hear the notification sound.

(Volume control process of general control unit)
The sound volume adjustment processing of the general control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the sound volume adjustment processing of the overall control unit 141.

  First, at step T5-1, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the sound volume adjustment set in the overall RAM 141c is possible (variable). If it is possible to adjust the volume, the process proceeds to step T5-2. If the volume adjustment is not possible (impossible), it is determined that the volume adjustment based on the operation of the cross key 19 can not be performed. Transfer the processing to -19.

  In step T5-2, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the notification sound of the security abnormality whose priority is "medium" or higher is being output. If an alarm sound of a security abnormality having a priority of "medium" or higher is being output, the process proceeds to step T5-19 as the volume adjustment based on the operation of the cross key 19 can not be performed, and the priority is "medium" If it is not in the process of outputting the alarm sound of the above security abnormality, the process proceeds to step T5-3.

  At step T5-3, the overall CPU 141a determines whether it is in the sound volume adjustable period. Specifically, during the waiting for customers state and during the variable effect production, the volume adjustment period is set, and during the light amount adjustment, the volume adjustment impossible period is set. If it is in the sound volume adjustable period, the process moves to step T5-4 as that the sound volume adjustment based on the operation of the cross key 19 is possible, and if it is not in the sound volume adjustable period, the operation of the cross key 19 The processing is transferred to step T5-19 assuming that the volume adjustment based on can not be performed.

  At step T5-4, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 have been operated. Specifically, it is determined whether there is an input of an operation signal from the arrow key detection switch 19a. If the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 have been operated, the process proceeds to step T5-10. If the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 have not been operated, the process proceeds to step T5-5.

  In step T5-5, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the variable symbol display of the special symbol or the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is currently in a customer waiting state. If in the customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step T5-6. If not in the customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step T5-15.

  At step T5-6, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not non-display of a volume-based image, which will be described later, continues for 5 seconds while in the customer waiting state. If the non-display of the volume image continues for 5 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-7. If the non-display of the volume image does not continue for 5 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-8. Move.

  The “volume-related image” refers to a volume adjustment guide image for guiding that volume adjustment can be performed by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19, and to notify of the current volume value and to operate the volume by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19. It is an image etc. during volume adjustment for guiding that the value is adjusted.

  At step T5-7, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the volume adjustment guide image in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. Thus, the image control unit 145 performs processing for displaying the volume adjustment guide image on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71).

  At step T5-8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the non-operation of the cross key 19 in the customer waiting state has continued for 20 minutes. If the operation of the cross key 19 has not been continued for 20 minutes, the process proceeds to step T5-15 because it can not be determined whether the previous player has ended the game, and the operation of the cross key 19 has not been performed. If continued for 20 minutes, at step T5-9, the current volume value is reset to the initial value of the volume value set in the general RAM 141c, assuming that the previous player ended the game.

  At step T5-10, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed. If the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-14 to switch to the image during volume adjustment, and if the volume adjustment guide image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-11. .

  At step T5-11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the image being adjusted in volume is being displayed. If the image during volume adjustment is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-12 to perform volume adjustment, and if the image during volume adjustment is not being displayed, the step for displaying the volume adjustment guide image Transfer the process to T5-14.

  At step T5-12, the overall CPU 141a performs volume change processing for changing the volume value. Specifically, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, if the volume value stored in the overall RAM 141 c is not the lower limit value, the volume value is decremented by 1, and the operation of the right button of the cross key 19 is performed. If there is no upper limit value of the volume value stored in the general RAM 141c, the volume value is incremented by 1, and the volume change flag is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c. Accordingly, the presence or absence of the volume change flag is referred to in the above-described voice control processing, the volume change command is output to the voice control unit 148, and the volume of the effect sound being output is changed.

  At step T5-13, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the volume notification sound corresponding to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the audio control unit 148 performs processing for outputting a volume notification sound corresponding to the current volume value from the audio output device 9.

  At step T5-14, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the image under volume adjustment according to the current volume value to a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device) displays the image during volume adjustment by the image control unit 145 (in place of the volume adjustment guidance image when the volume adjustment guidance image is being displayed). 71) processing is to be performed. When this process ends, the present volume adjustment process ends.

  At step T5-15, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the image during volume adjustment is being displayed. If the volume adjustment image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-16 to determine whether the condition for erasing the volume adjustment image is satisfied, and the volume adjustment image is displayed. If not, the current volume adjustment processing ends.

  At step T5-16, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect button 17 has been operated. If the effect button 17 has been operated, the process proceeds to step T5-18. If the effect button 17 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step T5-17.

  At step T5-17, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds. If the non-operation of the cross key 19 continues for 10 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-18. If the non-operation of the cross key 19 does not continue for 10 seconds, the volume adjustment image is not erased. End the volume adjustment process this time.

  At step T5-18, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the image under volume adjustment set in the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for deleting the image being subjected to volume adjustment being displayed on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71). When this process ends, the present volume adjustment process ends.

  At step T5-19, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume system image (volume adjustment guide image, volume adjustment in-progress image) is being displayed. If the volume system image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-20. If the volume system image is not being displayed, the current volume adjustment process is ended.

  At step T5-20, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the volume-related image (volume adjustment guide image, image during volume adjustment) set in the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for deleting the volume-based image displayed on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device). When this process ends, the present volume adjustment process ends.

  Although the description of the light amount adjustment processing is omitted in the present embodiment, the flow of the basic processing is different from the volume adjustment processing in that the notification sound is output after the change of the light amount value. Are the same, it is only necessary to read "volume" and "light quantity" in the volume adjustment process.

(Specific example when volume adjustment is performed while waiting for customers)
A specific example in the case where the volume adjustment is performed while waiting for a customer will be described using FIG. The basic flow is the same as in the case where the light amount adjustment is performed.

  Here, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “2”, the reference information, the setting of the power saving mode are set in the general RAM 144, and the volume value is It is assumed that the light amount value is set to “3 (80% light amount)” while being set to “2 (40% volume)”.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 become effective periods for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and the first image display device 70 is powered. While "135" which is the initial production pattern 70a at the time of introduction is displayed, a volume adjustment guide image OAG and a light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

  Thereafter, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 become invalid and transition to a period (during volume adjustment) in which the volume can be adjusted. At this time, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), a volume adjustment-in-progress image OG corresponding to the current volume value “2” is displayed in the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70.

  When the left button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is decremented by 1 and becomes "1". At this time, as shown in FIG. 64C, the already-displayed volume adjustment image OG is updated to the volume adjustment image OG corresponding to the subtracted volume value “1”, and from the audio output device 9 The volume alarm sound "D" corresponding to the volume value "1" is output at a volume of 20% depending on (correspondence with) the volume value "1".

  Thereafter, when the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is not operated for 10 seconds, the period in which the volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment) is ended, and the effective period for volume adjustment or light amount adjustment becomes. At this time, when the volume adjustment image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is deleted and the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 continues for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. The volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

  Then, 30 seconds after the last operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the customer waiting effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and from the audio output device 9, BGM (customer waiting effect sound) corresponding to the customer waiting effect Is output.

  As described above, in the operation of the cross key 19 when the volume adjustment image OG (the light amount adjustment image) is not displayed, the volume adjustment image OG (the light amount adjustment image) is not changed without changing the volume value. Since the volume value is changed by the operation of the cross key 19 when displayed, it is possible to perform the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) after confirming the current volume value (light amount value) and improve the interest of the game It becomes possible.

(A specific example in the case where volume adjustment is performed during the fluctuation production)
A specific example in the case where the volume adjustment is performed during the fluctuation effect will be described with reference to FIG. The basic flow is the same as in the case where the light amount adjustment is performed.

  Here, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is “2”, the adjustment mode corresponding to the switch position “2”, the reference information, the setting of the power saving mode are set in the general RAM 144, and the volume value is It is assumed that the light amount value is set to “3 (80% light amount)” while being set to “2 (40% volume)”.

  In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 become effective periods for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and the first image display device 70 While "135" which is the initial production pattern 70a at the time of power-on is displayed, a volume adjustment guide image OAG and a light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

  After that, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 45 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60, the fluctuation effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the first image display device 70, the scroll of the effect pattern 70a is started, and from the sound output device 9, the BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is the volume value "2". Depends on (corresponds to) output at 20% volume.

  Thereafter, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 become invalid and transition to a period (during volume adjustment) in which the volume can be adjusted. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65C, a volume adjustment-in-progress image OG corresponding to the current volume value “2” is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the first image display device 70.

  When the right button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is incremented by one to be "3". At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the already-displayed volume adjustment image OG is updated to the volume adjustment image OG corresponding to the added volume value “3”, and is output from the audio output device 9 The BGM being output is output at a volume of 40% depending on (correspondence to) the volume value "3".

  Thereafter, when the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 is not operated for 10 seconds, the period in which the volume adjustment is possible (during volume adjustment) is ended, and the effective period for volume adjustment or light amount adjustment becomes. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the volume adjustment image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased.

  As described above, by enabling the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) by the operation of the cross key 19 even during the execution of the fluctuation effect, the convenience of the player is improved and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) is not possible even at the start of the change effect or at the end of the change effect, but it is temporarily adjusted at the start of the change effect or at the end of the change effect ) May be disabled. In that case, the image OG during volume adjustment (image under light adjustment) may be deleted, or only the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) may be disabled while being displayed.

  In addition, the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) is performed without displaying the volume adjustment in progress image OG (light amount adjustment in progress) instead of displaying the volume adjustment in progress image OG (light amount adjustment in progress) even while the fluctuation effect is being executed. You may make it possible.

(Specific example when setting change is performed)
A specific example in which the setting change is performed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. 66 (1) to 66 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the side of the effect control board 130.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, processing for waiting for activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, the activation waiting process is finished and the processing shifts to the activation processing, and at the timing T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation has been performed, the setting value is changed. Switch to setting change mode and do not send detection of setting or error. Further, a setting change in-progress signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display unit 113.

  Then, when it is detected that the setting value fixing operation has been performed at the timing of T4, the power on designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (such as detection of winning of the game ball and detection of occurrence of error etc. The game progress mode is entered, and processing for calculating performance information (normal history information such as a base value) is started (updating the middle payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal middle out number counter).

  At this time, the output of the power on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) is started from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 are started. The first special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display are displayed by displaying an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit) having a predetermined missing appearance. 64 is a display indicating that the number of special views is “0”, and the information display unit 113 starts lighting confirmation in which the 7-segment display is fully turned on.

  Thereafter, when it is detected that the customer waiting state is detected at the timing T5, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses at the timing T6, the information display 113 Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

  Next, at timing T9 after timing T7 to T8, when a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, a winning ball (three gaming balls) is paid out from the payout device 95. The counter during normal payouts is updated, and the first special symbol hold display 63 indicates that the first special figure hold number is “1”, and the first special symbol memory designation command and the first starting opening winning combination command And send a pre-change command.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special drawing reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol holding display 63 is displayed to indicate that the first special drawing holding number is "0", and the special display is made to be stopped. After the symbol is determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation start command such as the special symbol designation command or the special pattern variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 Start.

  Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops displaying a lost special symbol and transmits a symbol determination command, and at the timing of T12, it detects that it is a customer waiting state , Send customer wait state specification command.

(Operation example 1 of the effect control board side)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66A and 67, an operation example 1 of the effect control board 130 in the case of normally receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. 67 (1-a) to (1-h) correspond to those in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 67 (1-a)).

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of 7 colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (1-b)).

  Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting is changed to a setting change mode for changing the setting, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change in progress screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-c)).

  After that, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the transition to the effect progression mode for performing the game effect is started, and the power-on notification is started. At this time, a power-on alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white, and adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount is possible by the operation of the cross key 19. State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed (refer FIG. 67 (1-d)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T5, the customer waiting state is established, but the power on notification is continued, and the timing of T7 after the timing of T6. When the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on alarm sound has elapsed, the output of the sound from the sound output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the initial rendering symbol "135", the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 67 (1-e)).

  Then, at the timing T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 has elapsed, the power on notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started.

  Thereafter, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at timing T9, the first special view pending stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Next, at the timing of T10, after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is normally received, the fluctuation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (1-f)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (1-g)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is established. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image and the like continues (see FIG. 67 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 of the effect control board side)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 (2) and 67, an operation example 2 of the effect control board 130 in the case where the power on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally will be described. 67 (2-a) to (2-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 67 (2-a)).

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (2-b)).

  Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting is transitioned to the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change-in-progress screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-c)).

  After that, if there is a reception error that can not normally receive the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at timing T4, the power-on notification which should normally be executed will not be executed. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change-in-progress screen continues (see FIG. 67 (2-d)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T5, the process proceeds to an effect progression mode for performing a game effect, and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started, and the volume and the light quantity can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image or the like of the effect mode A common to each other is displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-e)).

  Then, at T9 timing after the timing of T6 to T8, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number of 1st Tokdo Holds. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Next, at the timing of T10, after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is normally received, the fluctuation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. And in the 1st image display device 70, the 1st reservation icon is changed into the said icon, and the change display of effect pattern 70a is started (refer FIG. 67 (2-f)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (2-g)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is established. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 67 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 of the effect control board side)
Next, referring to FIGS. 66 (3) and 67, an operation example 3 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the power on designation command and the customer wait state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally will be described. explain. 67 (3-a) to (3-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 66 (a) to (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 67 (3-a)).

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of 7 colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (3-b)).

  Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting is transitioned to the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, a setting change in progress screen showing that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67 (3-c)).

  Thereafter, at timing T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification which should normally be executed is not executed. Continue the setting change mode. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues (see FIG. 67 (3-d)).

  Next, at timing T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally, transition to the customer waiting state which should be transitioned should be made. Continue the setting change mode without. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (3-e)).

  Then, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing T9 after the timing T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c Update the stored number of 1st Tokdo Holds, but continue the setting change mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and thereafter the special pattern fluctuation pattern designating command is If it receives normally, it will transfer to the production | presentation advancing mode for performing a game production, and will start a fluctuation production. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the audio output device 9, and in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started, and the cross key 19 is operated. It becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light intensity. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of the effect mode A common at the time) is displayed, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 67 (3-f)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 67 (3-g)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is established. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image and the like continues (see FIG. 67 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 of effect control board side)
Next, using FIG. 66 (4) and FIG. 67, an effect when the power on designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally. An operation example 4 on the control substrate 130 side will be described. 67 (4-a) to (4-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 67 (4-a)).

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 67 (4-b)).

  Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting is transitioned to the setting change mode for performing the setting change notification, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, a setting change in progress screen showing that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 67 (4-c)).

  Thereafter, at timing T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification which should normally be executed is not executed. Continue the setting change mode. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-d)).

  Next, at timing T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally, transition to the customer waiting state which should be transitioned should be made. Continue the setting change mode without. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-e)).

  Then, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing T9 after the timing T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c Update the stored number of 1st Tokdo Holds, but continue the setting change mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and thereafter the special pattern fluctuation pattern designating command is When the reception error occurs because the reception can not be normally performed, the setting change mode is continued without performing the fluctuation effect that should normally be executed. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-f)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the setting change mode is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuation effect which should originally be derived. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 67 (4-g)).

  Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the process proceeds to a rendering progress mode for performing a game effect, and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started, and the volume and the light quantity can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed (refer FIG. 67 (4-h)).

  As described above, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 between the time when the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state and the time the power is turned off immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, the period in which the volume can be adjusted by the game shop clerk can be expanded, and the convenience of the game shop can be improved.

  In addition, after the effect control board 130 shifts to the setting change mode, a new command (a specific command for changing to the effect progression mode, that is, a command to significantly change the display image of the image display device) is normally performed. At the received timing, the setting change mode (screen under setting change) is ended, and the transition to the effect progression mode (normal screen) is made, so that mode transition can be performed according to the change of the effect control by the effect control board 130 Become.

  In addition, at the timing when the setting change mode (screen for changing settings) shifts to the effect progression mode (screen for effects), adjustment (setting) of the volume and light amount by the operation (player) of the cross key 19 becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light while actually confirming the effect, and it is possible to make the adjustment function kind to the player.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change process) and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first start opening 45, first 2) When the gaming ball has won in the first opening 47, the first large winning opening 50, the second large winning opening 53), the winning is invalidated and the gaming balls are not paid out, and the payout according to the winning is made. Since the base is not targeted for the calculation of the base value without the number being collected and the base value displayed on the information display unit 113 does not change, it is only possible when the player can execute the game. Performance information (history information) can be calculated, stored and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  In addition, when the game control ball flows into the out port 39 when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change process) and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device, this inflow is The player is not allowed to play the game because the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because the number of outs corresponding to the inflow is not collected and is not targeted for the calculation of the normal base value. The performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored and displayed only when feasible, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  Further, since the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device. When the game ball is won in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 53), The winning is effective and the game balls are paid out, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning is collected, and the normal base value to be calculated as the normal base value is changed and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 changes. Therefore, even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not in appearance, the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored and displayed, and accurate performance information is provided. It is possible and That.

  Further, since the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device. If the game ball flows into the out port 39 while the game is in progress, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to the inflow is collected and displayed on the information display 113 as a target of calculation of the normal base value. Because the base value to be played may change, the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored and displayed even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not set, It becomes possible to provide accurate performance information.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change process) and the setting changing screen is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are performed (error specification command is not transmitted). When the error notification is not executed and the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (screen for effect) is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments Since execution (transmission of an error designation command) causes error notification to be executable, useless processing is not performed under a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player will make a game or cheating while the setting is being changed. Processing load can be reduced.

  Also, since the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the setting change screen is displayed on the image display device. When the game is running, various error determinations are performed (error specification command is sent) and an error notification is performed. Therefore, even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not in appearance, an error occurs. Can be accurately reported. In this case, transition to the effect progression mode may be made to end the display of the setting change screen, or the display of the setting change screen may be maintained without transition to the effect progression mode.

  In addition, when transitioning from the setting change mode (screen under setting change) to the effect progression mode (normal screen), adjustment of the volume and the light amount by the operation (player) of the cross key 19 even if the power on notification is executed It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and light quantity by the operation of the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power on alarm sound is finished, instead of enabling the setting). It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light quantity by the operation of the cross key 19 at the timing when the key has completely ended.

  Also, the special symbol storage designation command or starting operation is not performed, even if the special symbol storage designation command as the pre-variation command or the starting opening winning combination designation command is properly received during the setting change mode, instead of shifting to the effect progression mode. It is also possible to shift to the effect progression mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is received normally.

  In addition, even if the symbol determination command is normally received during the setting change mode, the transition to the effect proceeding mode is not performed, but the transition to the effect proceeding mode may be performed at the timing when the symbol determination command is normally received. Good. In addition, information indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination may be included in the symbol determination command, and in this case, the effect symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination (for example, “777” for big hit, “246” for lost) ) May be displayed, but it is preferable to display a common initial effect symbol "135" at the time of power ON (low probability non-time game state).

  In addition, when the fluctuation start command (special symbol specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the effect progression mode and the normal screen (screen for effect ) May be displayed (the variation effect is started), and the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the setting change mode is continued and the setting change screen is displayed. In this case, it is preferable to shift to the effect progression mode and display the normal screen (effect screen) by normally receiving the customer waiting state designating command and the opening designating command.

  Further, the light emission colors of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device in the setting change notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device in the power-on notification. This makes it easier to recognize which of the setting change notification and the power-on notification is being performed.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change process), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, incorrect winning error, magnetic error, radio error, door opening error, operation error) In the case of execution, even if various errors occur and an error designation command is transmitted, the image display apparatus maintains the setting change notification and restricts (limits) the error notification. The priority (importance) of the error notification may be set lower (lower) than the setting change notification.

(Specific example when RWM clear is performed)
A specific example in the case where RWM clear is performed at power ON will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 (1) to 68 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, processing for waiting for activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at time T2, the process waits for start-up and shifts to start-up process. At time T3, when it is detected that the RWM clear operation has been performed, a predetermined area in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized. To shift to the RWM clear mode (no detection of winning of the game ball, detection of occurrence of an error, etc.) to be performed, and an RWM clear designation command is transmitted. Also, the RWM clear signal is output from the security signal terminal.

  Then, when it is detected that the RWM clear confirmation operation has been performed at the timing of T4, the power on designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (such as detection of winning of the game ball and detection of occurrence of error etc. The game progress mode is entered, and processing for calculating performance information (normal history information such as a base value) is started (updating the middle payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal middle out number counter).

  At this time, the output of the power on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) is started from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 are started. The first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator, displays an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the indicator lights up) which is a predetermined missing issue. 64 and the normal symbol hold display 65 become a display indicating that the special drawing reserve number is "0", and in the information display unit 113, the lighting confirmation for turning on the 7 segment display all is started.

  Thereafter, when it is detected that the customer waiting state is detected at the timing T5, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses at the timing T6, the information display 113 Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

  Next, at timing T9 after timing T7 to T8, when a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, a winning ball (three gaming balls) is paid out from the payout device 95. The counter during normal payouts is updated, and the first special symbol hold display 63 indicates that the first special figure hold number is “1”, and the first special symbol memory designation command and the first starting opening winning combination command And send a pre-change command.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special drawing reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol holding display 63 is displayed to indicate that the first special drawing holding number is "0", and the special display is made to be stopped. After the symbol is determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation start command such as the special symbol designation command or the special pattern variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 Start.

  Then, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops displaying a lost special symbol and transmits a symbol determination command, and at the timing of T12, it detects that it is a customer waiting state , Send customer wait state specification command.

(Operation example 1 of the effect control board side)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 (1) and 69, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side in the case of normally receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. 69 (1-a) to (1-h) correspond to those in FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 69 (1-a)).

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of 7 colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (1-b)).

  Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a clear confirmation screen indicating that RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a is displayed (see FIG. 69 (1-c)).

  After that, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the transition to the effect progression mode for performing the game effect is started, and the power-on notification is started. At this time, a power-on alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white, and adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount is possible by the operation of the cross key 19. State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of the effect mode A common at the time are displayed (refer FIG. 69 (1-d)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T5, the customer waiting state is established, but the power on notification is continued, and the timing of T7 after the timing of T6. When the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on alarm sound has elapsed, the output of the sound from the sound output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the initial rendering symbol "135", the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 69 (1-e)).

  Then, at the timing T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 has elapsed, the power on notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started.

  Thereafter, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at timing T9, the first special view pending stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Next, at the timing of T10, after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is normally received, the fluctuation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. And in the 1st image display device 70, the 1st reservation icon is changed into the said icon, and the fluctuation display of production design 70a is started (refer FIG. 69 (1-f)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after fluctuating display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (1-g)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is established. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 69 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 of the effect control board side)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 (2) and 69, an operation example 2 of the effect control board 130 in the case where the power on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally will be described. 69 (2-a) to (2-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 69 (2-a)).

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (2-b)).

  Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a clear confirmation screen indicating that RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a is displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-c)).

  After that, if there is a reception error that can not normally receive the power on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the power on notification which should be originally executed will not be executed. . At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (2-d)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T5, the process proceeds to an effect progression mode for performing a game effect, and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started, and the volume and the light quantity can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image or the like of the effect mode A common to each time is displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-e)).

  Then, at T9 timing after the timing of T6 to T8, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number of 1st Tokdo Holds. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Next, at the timing of T10, after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is normally received, the fluctuation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 69 (2-f)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (2-g)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is established. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 67 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 of the effect control board side)
Next, referring to FIGS. 68 (3) and 69, an operation example 3 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the power on designation command and the customer wait state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally will be described. explain. 69 (3-a) to (3-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 69 (3-a)).

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of 7 colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (3-b)).

  Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a clear confirmation screen indicating that RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a is displayed (see FIG. 69 (3-c)).

  Thereafter, at timing T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification which should normally be executed is not executed. Continue RWM clear mode. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (3-d)).

  Next, at timing T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally, transition to the customer waiting state which should be transitioned should be made. Continue RWM clear mode without. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (3-e)).

  Then, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing T9 after the timing T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c Update the stored number of 1st Tokdo Holds but continue the RWM clear mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting changing screen continues and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and thereafter the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command Is normally received, the game proceeds to an effect progression mode for performing a game effect, and a variable effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the audio output device 9, and in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started, and the cross key 19 is operated. It becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light intensity. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of the effect mode A common at a time) is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 70a is started (refer FIG. 69 (3-f)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 69 (3-g)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is established. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 69 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 of effect control board side)
Next, using FIG. 68 (4) and FIG. 69, an effect when the power on designation command, the customer wait state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally. An operation example 4 on the control substrate 130 side will be described. 69 (4-a) to (4-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 69 (4-a)).

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of 7 colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 69 (4-b)).

  Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a clear confirmation screen indicating that RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a is displayed (see FIG. 69 (4-c)).

  Thereafter, at timing T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification which should normally be executed is not executed. Continue RWM clear mode. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-d)).

  Next, at timing T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally, transition to the customer waiting state which should be transitioned should be made. Continue RWM clear mode without. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-e)).

  Then, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing T9 after the timing T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c Update the stored number of 1st Tokdo Holds but continue the RWM clear mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen is continued, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the RWM clear mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and thereafter the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command Can not be received normally, and if a reception error occurs, the RWM clear mode is continued without performing the fluctuation effect that should normally be executed. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-f)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the RWM clear mode is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuation effect that should originally be derived. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the clear confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 69 (4-g)).

  Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the process proceeds to a rendering progress mode for performing a game effect, and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started, and the volume and the light quantity can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the same time are displayed (refer FIG. 69 (4-h)).

  As described above, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 between the time when the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state and the time the power is turned off immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, the period in which the volume can be adjusted by the game shop clerk can be expanded, and the convenience of the game shop can be improved.

  In addition, after the effect control board 130 shifts to the RWM clear mode, a new command (a specific command for transferring to the effect progression mode, that is, a command to significantly change the display image of the image display device) is normally performed. At the received timing, the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) is ended and the transition to the effect progression mode (normal screen) is made, so that mode transition can be performed according to the change of the effect control by the effect control board 130 .

  In addition, at the timing when the RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) is shifted to the effect progression mode (normal screen), it becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light amount by the operation (player) of the cross key 19. It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light quantity while actually confirming the effect, and it is possible to make the adjustment function kind to the player.

  Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first start opening 45, second) When the game ball is won in the starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50, the second large winning opening 53), the winning is invalidated and the payout of the gaming ball is not performed, and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning Because the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is not the target of calculation of the normal base value without being collected, the performance of the gaming machine only when the player can execute the game Information (history information) can be calculated, stored and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  In addition, when the game ball flows into the out port 39 when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear process) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, this inflow is invalidated. The player performs a game since the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because the out number corresponding to the inflow is not collected and the normal base value is not calculated. Performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored and displayed only when possible, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  Further, since the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When a game ball is won in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 53) Becomes effective, the game balls are paid out, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 changes as the target of the normal base value calculation. Since there is, it is possible to accurately calculate, store and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not in appearance, and provide accurate performance information. Is possible That.

  Further, since the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device. When the game ball flows into the out port 39 when this is in, this inflow becomes effective, the number of out according to the inflow is collected, and it is displayed on the information display 113 as the target of the calculation of the normal base value. The base value may change, so it is possible to accurately calculate, store and display performance information (history information) of the gaming machine even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not in appearance. It is possible to provide accurate performance information.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clear mode (RWM clear process) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are performed (error designation command is not transmitted). When the error notification is not executed and the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (screen for effect) is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are executed. (Error specification command is transmitted), and since error notification can be performed, useless processing is not performed under a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player is playing a game or performing an illegal action during RWM clear processing. Processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the clear confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device because the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power on designation command. When various error determinations are performed (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification is performed, an error occurs even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not in appearance. It becomes possible to notify correctly. In this case, the transition to the effect progression mode may be ended and the display of the clear confirmation screen may be ended, or the display of the clear confirmation screen may be maintained without transition to the effect progression mode.

  In addition, when it shifts from RWM clear mode (clear confirmation screen) to effect progression mode (normal screen), adjustment (setting of volume and light quantity by operation (player) of cross key 19 even if power on notification is executed (setting ) May be enabled, but it may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and light quantity by the operation of the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power on alarm sound is finished. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light quantity by the operation of the cross key 19 at the timing when the processing is completely ended.

  In addition, special symbol memory specified command or start is not made not to shift to the effect progression mode even if the special symbol memory specified command and start opening prize specified command as the command before change is received normally during RWM clear mode. It is also possible to shift to the effect progression mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is received normally.

  In addition, even if the symbol determination command is normally received during the RWM clear mode, the transition to the effect proceeding mode is not performed, but the transition to the effect proceeding mode may be performed at the timing when the symbol determination command is normally received. Good.

  In addition, when the fluctuation start command (special symbol specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the effect progression mode and the normal screen (screen for effect ) May be displayed (variation effect is not started), and the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while continuing the RWM clear mode and displaying the clear confirmation screen. In this case, it is preferable to shift to the effect progression mode and display the normal screen (effect screen) by normally receiving the customer waiting state designating command and the opening designating command.

  Further, the emission colors of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 in the RWM clear preparation notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 in the power on notification. . This makes it easier to recognize which of the RWM clear preparation notification and the power on notification is being performed.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in RWM clear mode (RWM clear processing), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, incorrect winning error, magnetic error, radio error, door opening error, operation error) In the case of execution, even if various errors occur and an error designation command is transmitted, the RWM clear preparation notification is maintained in the image display device so that the error notification is restricted (restricted). The priority (importance) of the error notification may be set lower (lower) than the RWM clear preparation notification.

(A specific example when the control state of the game is restored)
70 and 71, a specific example in which the control state of the game is restored without the setting confirmation being performed when the power is turned on will be described. 70 (1) to 70 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the side of the effect control board 130. In addition, it shall recover | restore to a low probability non-time-saving game state (normal game state) here.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, processing for waiting for activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at time T2, the process waits for start-up and ends the process. Then, at time T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation are not performed, Processing to shift to the game progress mode for controlling the progress of the game by transmitting the recovery specification command, and calculating the performance information (normal information such as the base value etc.) (normal middle payout number counter, total out number counter Start updating the out counter during normal times).

  At this time, in the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62, an initial symbol which is a predetermined missing eye (for example, a plurality of symbols constituting the display) The first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and the normal symbol hold indicator 65 indicate that the number of special figures is "0". The information display unit 113 starts lighting confirmation in which the 7-segment display is fully turned on.

  Then, when it is detected that the customer waiting state is detected at the timing of T4, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the information display unit 113 Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

  After that, at timing T8 after timing T6 to T7, when a winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, a winning ball (three gaming balls) is paid out from the payout device 95, and it is normal The middle payout number counter is updated, and the first special symbol hold display 63 is displayed to indicate that the first special figure hold number “1”, such as a first special symbol memory specification command and a first start opening prize specification command Send a pre-change command.

  Next, at the timing of T9, when the first special drawing reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol holding display 63 is displayed to indicate that the first special drawing holding number is "0", and the special display is made to be stopped. After the symbol is determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation start command such as the special symbol designation command or the special pattern variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 Start.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops displaying the lost special symbol and transmits the symbol determination command, and at the timing of T11, detects that it is waiting for customers Then, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 of the effect control board side)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70A and 71, an operation example 1 of the effect control board 130 in the case of normally receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. FIGS. 71 (1-a) to (1-h) correspond to FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (h), respectively.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71 (1-a)).

  Then, when the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the transition to the effect progression mode for performing the game effect is started, and the power recovery notification is started. At this time, the power recovery notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white, and adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount is possible by the operation of the cross key 19. State. Then, on the first image display device 70, a power supply restoration screen indicating that the power supply has been restored is displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-b)).

  Thereafter, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the power supply restoration notification is continued although the customer waiting state is established. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the power recovery screen continues (see FIG. 71 (1-c)).

  Next, at the timing T6 after the timing T5, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power supply restoration alarm sound passes, the output of the sound from the sound output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed (refer to FIG. 71 (1-d)).

  Then, at the timing T7, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 has elapsed, the power supply recovery notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, a volume adjustment guide image OAG and a light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial rendering pattern and the background image (see FIG. 71 (1-e)).

  Thereafter, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at timing T8, the first special view reserved in the sub RAM 130c is suspended. Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Then, after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T9, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon to start variable display of the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 71 (1-f)).

  Next, at timing T10, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (1-g)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 71 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 of the effect control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 70 (2) and FIG. 71, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side when the power on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally will be described. 71 (2-a) to (2-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71 (2-a)).

  Then, if there is a reception error that can not normally receive the power supply recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T3, the power supply recovery notification which should be originally executed will not be executed. . Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (2-b)).

  After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the process proceeds to a rendering progress mode for performing a game effect, and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed (refer to Drawing 71 (2-c)).

  Next, at the timing T6 after the timing T5, the first image display device 70 displays the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG in addition to the initial rendering pattern and the background image (see FIG. 71 (2-d)).

  Then, at the timing T7, when the waiting time for the customer waiting effect has passed, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, a demo BGM is output from the voice output device 9, and in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, demonstration decoration light emission for attracting the interest of the player is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, a demonstration display effect for attracting the player's interest is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 71 (2-e )reference).

  Thereafter, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at timing T8, the first special view reserved in the sub RAM 130c is suspended. Update the number and end the customer waiting effect. At this time, in the first image display device 70, the initial rendering symbol "135", the background image, and the like are displayed, and the first hold icon is additionally displayed.

  Then, after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T9, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. And in the 1st image display device 70, the 1st reservation icon is changed into the said icon, and the change display of effect pattern 70a is started (refer FIG. 71 (2-f)).

  Next, at timing T10, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (2-g)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the customer waiting state is established. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 71 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 of effect control board)
Next, referring to FIG. 70 (3) and FIG. 71, the operation example 3 on the side of the effect control board 130 in the case where the power on designation command and the customer wait state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally. explain. 71 (3-a) to (3-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of 7 colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71 (3-a)).

  Then, if there is a reception error that can not normally receive the power supply recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T3, the power supply recovery notification which should be originally executed will not be executed. . Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (3-b)).

  Thereafter, when a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be normally received at the timing of T4, the customer waiting state does not shift to the normal waiting state. To continue waiting for commands. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (3-c)).

  Then, since no command is received from the main control board 110 at timings T5 to T7, the command waiting state is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (3-d) and FIG. 71 (3-e)).

  Next, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from main control board 110 is received at timing T8, the first special figure stored in sub RAM 130c Update pending count but continue waiting for commands. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and thereafter the special pattern fluctuation pattern designating command is If it receives normally, it will transfer to the production | presentation advancing mode for performing a game production, and will start a fluctuation production. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the audio output device 9, and in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started, and the cross key 19 is operated. It becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light intensity. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of the effect mode A common at a time) is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 70a is started (refer FIG. 71 (3-f)).

  Thereafter, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T10, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after fluctuating display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 71 (3-g)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image and the like continues (see FIG. 71 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 of effect control board side)
Next, using FIG. 70 (4) and FIG. 71, an effect when the power supply recovery designation command, the customer wait state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally. An operation example 4 on the control substrate 130 side will be described. 71 (4-a) to (4-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (h).

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 71 (4-a)).

  Then, if there is a reception error that can not normally receive the power supply recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T3, the power supply recovery notification which should be originally executed will not be executed. . Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (4-b)).

  Thereafter, when a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be normally received at the timing of T4, the customer waiting state does not shift to the normal waiting state. To continue waiting for commands. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (4-c)).

  Next, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at timing T8 after timing T5 to T7, the sub RAM 130c Update the number of 1st Tokdo Holds stored in and continue waiting for commands. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and thereafter the special pattern fluctuation pattern designating command is If a reception error occurs because the signal can not be normally received, the command waiting state is continued without performing the fluctuation effect that should normally be executed. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (4-f)).

  After that, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T10, the command waiting state is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuation effect which should be originally derived. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the color bar and the version information continues (see FIG. 71 (4-g)).

  Next, when a customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the process proceeds to a rendering progress mode for performing a game effect, and the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started, and the volume and the light quantity can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) Background image etc. of the effect mode A which is common at the time) is displayed (see FIG. 71 (4-h)).

  As described above, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 between the time when the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state and the time the power is turned off immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, the period in which the volume can be adjusted by the game shop clerk can be expanded, and the convenience of the game shop can be improved.

  In addition, after the effect control board 130 shifts to the command waiting state, a new command (a specific command for transferring to the effect progression mode, that is, a command to significantly change the display image of the image display device) is normally performed. At the received timing, the command waiting state (initial screen) ends and the transition to the effect progression mode (normal screen) is made, so that mode transition can be performed according to the change of the effect control by the effect control board 130.

  In addition, since it becomes possible to adjust (set) the volume and light amount by the operation (player) of the cross key 19 at the timing when transitioning from the command waiting state (initial screen) to the effect progression mode (normal screen), It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light while confirming the effect, and it is possible to make the adjustment function gentle to the player.

  In addition, when it shifts from the command waiting state (initial screen) to the effect progression mode (normal screen), adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light quantity by the operation (player) of the cross key 19 even if the power recovery notification is executed. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and light quantity by the operation of the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power supply recovery alarm sound is finished, instead of making it possible. At the timing when the process ends, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the amount of light by the operation of the cross key 19 may be made possible.

  In addition, it is not to prevent transition to the effect progression mode even if the special symbol memory designating command as the pre-fluctuation command or the starting opening prize winning command is normally received during the command waiting state, but the special symbol memory designating command or engine It is also possible to shift to the effect progression mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is received normally.

  In addition, even if the symbol determination command is normally received while waiting for a command, the transition to the progression mode is not performed, but the transition to the progression mode is normally performed at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

(Specific example when setting confirmation is performed)
A specific example in the case where the setting confirmation is performed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIGS. 72 (1) to 72 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side. Here, it is assumed that the state is restored to the low probability non-time game state (normal game state) after the setting confirmation.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, processing for waiting for activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, the process for waiting for activation is completed and the process proceeds to the activation process. At the timing T3, when it is detected that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the setting value saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c Move to setting confirmation mode to confirm and send a setting confirmation specification command. In addition, a setting confirmation signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display unit 113.

  Then, when it is detected that the confirmation termination operation has been performed at the timing of T4, the power recovery designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (detection of winning of the game ball, detection of occurrence of error, etc. are performed The game progress mode is entered, and processing for calculating performance information (normal history information such as a base value) is started (update of the normal middle payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal middle out number counter).

  At this time, in the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62, an initial symbol which is a predetermined missing eye (for example, a plurality of symbols constituting the display) The first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 indicate that the number of special views is "0", and the information indicator 113 is displayed. Then, the lighting confirmation to start all lighting of the 7-segment display is started.

  Thereafter, when it is detected that the customer waiting state is detected at the timing T5, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses at the timing T6, the information display 113 Start displaying performance information (normal base value).

  After that, when the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7 to T8, the winning ball (three gaming balls) is paid out from the payout device 95 and the normal The middle payout number counter is updated, and the first special symbol hold display 63 is displayed to indicate that the first special figure hold number “1”, such as a first special symbol memory specification command and a first start opening prize specification command Send a pre-change command.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special drawing reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol holding display 63 is displayed to indicate that the first special drawing holding number is "0", and the special display is made to be stopped. After the symbol is determined, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation start command such as the special symbol designation command or the special pattern variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 Start.

  Next, at the timing of T11, when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops displaying the special symbol and determines the symbol determination command, and at the timing of T12, detects that it is waiting for customers Then, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 of the effect control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 72 (1) and FIG. 73, an operation example 1 on the effect control board 130 side in the case of normally receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. FIGS. 73 (1-a) to (1-i) correspond to FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (i), respectively.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (1-a)).

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at timing T3, the setting confirmation mode for setting confirmation is entered, and setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting confirmation in-progress screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-b)).

  Thereafter, when the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the transition to the effect progression mode for performing a game effect is performed, and the power recovery notification is started. At this time, the power recovery notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white, and adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount is possible by the operation of the cross key 19. State. Then, on the first image display device 70, a power supply restoration screen indicating that the power supply has been restored is displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-c)).

  Next, at timing T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the power supply recovery notification is continued although the customer waiting state is established. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the power supply restoration screen continues (see FIG. 73 (1-d)).

  Then, at the timing T7 after the timing T6, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power supply restoration alarm sound passes, the output of the audio from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of the effect mode A common to the time are displayed (refer FIG. 73 (1-e)).

  Thereafter, at the timing T8, when the lighting time (60 seconds) in white of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power supply recovery notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial rendering pattern and the background image (see FIG. 73 (1-f)).

  Next, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from main control board 110 is received at timing T9, the first special figure stored in sub RAM 130c Update the pending count. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Then, after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T10, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (1-g)).

  Then, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after fluctuating display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (1-h)).

  Thereafter, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image and the like continues (see FIG. 73 (1-i)).

(Operation example 2 of the effect control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 72 (2) and FIG. 73, an operation example 2 on the effect control board 130 side in the case where the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally will be described. FIGS. 73 (2-a) to (2-i) correspond to FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (i), respectively.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (2-a)).

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at timing T3, the setting confirmation mode for setting confirmation is entered, and setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting confirmation in-progress screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 73 (2-b)).

  After that, if there is a reception error that can not normally receive the power supply recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at timing T4, the power supply recovery notification that should be originally performed will not be executed. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (2-c)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T5, the process proceeds to an effect progression mode for performing a game effect, and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started, and the volume and the light quantity can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed (refer to Drawing 73 (2-d)).

  Then, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T6, the first image display device 70 displays the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG in addition to the initial rendering pattern and the background image ( See FIG. 73 (2-e)).

  Thereafter, at the timing T8, when the waiting time for the customer waiting effect has passed, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, a demo BGM is output from the voice output device 9, and in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74, demonstration decoration light emission for attracting the interest of the player is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, a demonstration display effect for attracting the player's interest is started with the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG being displayed (FIG. 73 (2-f )reference).

  Next, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from main control board 110 is received at timing T9, the first special figure stored in sub RAM 130c Update the number of reservations and end customer-facing effects. At this time, in the first image display device 70, the initial rendering symbol "135", the background image, and the like are displayed, and the first hold icon is additionally displayed.

  Then, after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T10, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 73 (2-g)).

  Then, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after fluctuating display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (2-h)).

  Thereafter, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 73 (2-i)).

(Operation example 3 of effect control board)
Next, referring to FIGS. 72 (3) and 73, an operation example 3 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the power on designation command and the customer wait state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally will be described. explain. FIGS. 73 (3-a) to (3-i) correspond to FIGS. 72 (a) to (i), respectively.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (3-a)).

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at timing T3, the setting confirmation mode for setting confirmation is entered, and setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting confirmation in-progress screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 73 (3-b)).

  After that, if there is a reception error that can not normally receive the power supply recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at timing T4, the power supply recovery notification that should be originally performed will not be executed. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (3-c)).

  Next, at timing T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally, transition to the customer waiting state which should be transitioned should be made. Continue the setting confirmation mode without. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (3-d)).

  Then, at timings T6 to T8, the setting confirmation mode is continued since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. Then, in the first image display device 70, display of the screen during setting confirmation continues (see FIG. 73 (3-e) to FIG. 73 (3-f)).

  Thereafter, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at timing T9, the first special view pending stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number but continue the configuration check mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues and the additional display of the first holding icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and thereafter, the special figure fluctuation pattern designating command Is normally received, the game proceeds to an effect progression mode for performing a game effect, and a variable effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect is output from the sound output device 9, and the fluctuation decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuation effect is started in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of the effect mode A common at a time are displayed, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (refer FIG. 73 (3-g)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the fluctuation effect is derived. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuation effect output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the effect design pattern 70a of the loss that has been temporarily stopped after being variably displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 73 (3-h)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is established. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the effect design pattern 70a of the loss, the background image, etc. continues (see FIG. 73 (3-i)).

(Operation example 4 of effect control board side)
Next, using FIG. 72 (4) and FIG. 73, an effect when the power supply recovery designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally. An operation example 4 on the control substrate 130 side will be described. FIGS. 73 (4-a) to (4-i) correspond to FIGS. 72 (a) to (i), respectively.

  First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the volume initial value) can be switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with color bars of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 73 (4-a)).

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at timing T3, the setting confirmation mode for setting confirmation is entered, and setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting confirmation in-progress screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 73 (4-b)).

  After that, if there is a reception error that can not normally receive the power supply recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at timing T4, the power supply recovery notification that should be originally performed will not be executed. At this time, lighting in white continues in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (4-c)).

  Next, at timing T5, if a reception error occurs because the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 can not be received normally, transition to the customer waiting state which should be transitioned should be made. Continue the setting confirmation mode without. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (4-d)).

  Then, at timings T6 to T8, the setting confirmation mode is continued since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the screen during setting confirmation continues (see FIG. 73 (4-e) to FIG. 73 (4-f)).

  Thereafter, when a pre-variation command such as a first special symbol storage designation command or a first starting opening winning combination designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at timing T9, the first special view pending stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number but continue the configuration check mode. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues and the additional display of the first holding icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the fluctuation effect, and thereafter the special pattern fluctuation pattern designating command is If a reception error occurs because the reception can not be normally performed, the setting confirmation mode is continued without performing the fluctuation effect that should normally be executed. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 71 (4-g)).

  Next, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T11, the setting confirmation mode is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuation effect that should originally be derived. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 73 (4-h)).

  Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the process proceeds to a rendering progress mode for performing a game effect, and becomes a customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started, and the volume and the light quantity can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed (refer to Drawing 73 (4-i)).

  As described above, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 between the time when the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state and the time the power is turned off immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, the period in which the volume can be adjusted by the game shop clerk can be expanded, and the convenience of the game shop can be improved.

  In addition, after the effect control board 130 shifts to the setting confirmation mode, a new command (a specific command for changing to the effect progression mode, that is, a command to significantly change the display image of the image display device) is normally performed. At the received timing, the setting confirmation mode (screen under setting confirmation) is ended, and the transition to the effect progression mode (normal screen) is made, so that it is possible to perform the mode transition according to the change of the effect control by the effect control board 130 Become.

  Also, at the timing when the setting confirmation mode (screen under setting confirmation) is shifted to the effect progression mode (normal screen), the volume level and light amount can be adjusted (set) by the operation (player) of the cross key 19 The volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) while actually confirming the effect, and it is possible to make the adjustment function kind to the player.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation process) and the screen during setting confirmation is displayed on the image display device, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first start opening 45, first 2) When the gaming ball has won in the first opening 47, the first large winning opening 50, the second large winning opening 53), the winning is invalidated and the gaming balls are not paid out, and the payout according to the winning is made. Since the base is not targeted for the calculation of the base value without the number being collected and the base value displayed on the information display unit 113 does not change, it is only possible when the player can execute the game. Performance information (history information) can be calculated, stored and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  If the game ball flows into the out port 39 when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation process) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, this inflow is The player is not allowed to play the game because the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because the number of outs corresponding to the inflow is not collected and is not targeted for the calculation of the normal base value. The performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored and displayed only when feasible, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  Also, as the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power recovery designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the screen during setting confirmation is displayed on the image display device. When the game ball is won in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 53), The winning is effective and the game balls are paid out, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning is collected, and the normal base value to be calculated as the normal base value is changed and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 changes. Therefore, even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not in appearance, the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored and displayed, and accurate performance information is provided. It is possible and That.

  In addition, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the screen during setting confirmation is displayed on the image display device because the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power recovery designation command. When the game ball flows into the out port 39 when this is in, this inflow becomes effective, the number of out according to the inflow is collected, and it is displayed on the information display 113 as the target of the calculation of the normal base value. The base value may change, so even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not set, performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored and displayed accurately. Performance information can be provided.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation process) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are performed (error specification command is not transmitted). When the error notification is not executed and the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (screen for effect) is displayed on the image display device, various error judgments Since execution (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification can be performed, useless processing is not performed under a situation where it is difficult to assume that a player will play a game or perform an illegal action during setting confirmation processing. Processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the screen during setting confirmation is displayed on the image display device because the effect control board 130 can not normally receive the power recovery designation command. When the game is running, various error determinations are performed (error specification command is sent) and an error notification is performed. Therefore, even if the game progress mode (rendering progress mode) is not in appearance, an error occurs. Can be accurately reported. In this case, display of the setting confirmation screen may be ended by transitioning to the effect progression mode, or display of the setting confirmation screen may be maintained without transition to the effect progression mode.

  When the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) is shifted to the effect progression mode (normal screen), adjustment of the volume and the light amount by the operation (player) of the cross key 19 even if the power recovery notification is executed It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and light quantity by the operation of the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power recovery alarm sound is finished, instead of enabling the setting). It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light quantity by the operation of the cross key 19 at the timing when the key has completely ended.

  Also, the special symbol storage specification command or startup is not performed, not to shift to the effect progression mode even if the special symbol storage specification command as the pre-variation command or the starting opening winning combination specification command is properly received during the setting confirmation mode. It is also possible to shift to the effect progression mode at the timing when the mouth prize designation command is received normally.

  In addition, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the setting confirmation mode, the transition to the effect progression mode is not performed, but the transition to the effect progression mode may be performed at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

  In addition, when the fluctuation start command (special symbol specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the effect progression mode and the normal screen (screen for effect ) May not be displayed (the variation effect is started), but the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the setting confirmation mode is continued and the setting confirmation screen is displayed. In this case, it is preferable to shift to the effect progression mode and display the normal screen (effect screen) by normally receiving the customer waiting state designating command and the opening designating command.

  Further, the emission colors of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device in the setting confirmation notification may be different from the emission colors of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device in the power supply recovery notification. In this way, it becomes easy to recognize which of the setting confirmation notification and the power supply recovery notification is being issued.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation process), various error judgments (abnormal winning error, incorrect winning error, magnetic error, radio error, door opening error, operation error) In the case of execution, even if various errors occur and an error designation command is transmitted, the image display apparatus maintains the setting confirmation notification and restricts (limits) the error notification. The priority (importance) of the error notification may be set lower (lower) than the setting confirmation notification.

  In the present embodiment, a game is performed using a game medium such as a game ball, and a predetermined amount of game medium is awarded to the player as a prize when the award condition is satisfied by the game. It is also possible to play a game using value data (game value) corresponding to the above, and to give a predetermined amount of value data (game value) as a prize to the player when the condition for the award by the game is satisfied.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In the second embodiment, an abnormality notification LED for notifying that an abnormality has occurred on the upper portion of the glass frame 4 is provided.

(Initial setting process of main control board in the second embodiment)
The initialization process of the main control board 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110 in the second embodiment. Here, only portions different from the initial setting process in the first embodiment will be described, and the same step numbers will be assigned to the same portions and the description will be omitted.

  In the initial setting process shown in FIG. 74, step S30A is provided between step S30 and step S31 in the initial setting process shown in FIG.

  In step S30A, main CPU 110a refers to the value of the first area of the base storage area of the information RWM area, and is a normal base value indicating what number the game section is currently and the normal base value of the current game section The designated command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Thereby, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing base alert notification is performed.

  "Base alert notification" is a notification for recognizing that the normal base value in the current game section is not a proper value or may deviate from the proper value, and a special background image is displayed on the image display device. Alternatively, the abnormality notification LED provided on the glass frame 4 is lighted or blinked in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) over a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).

(A command analysis process of the effect control unit in the second embodiment)
The command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m in the second embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m in the second embodiment. Here, only the parts that are different from the command analysis processing in the first embodiment will be described, the same step numbers will be assigned to the parts that match, and the description will be omitted.

  In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 75, steps E330 and E331 are provided after step E329 in the command analysis process shown in FIG.

  In step E328, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game system designation command. If it is the special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E329. If it is not the special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E330.

  In step E330, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a normal base value designation command. If it is determined that the command is a normal base value designation command, the process proceeds to step E331. If the command is not a normal base value designation command, the present command analysis process is ended.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a base alert notification process in step E331. Specifically, the base alert notification described above is satisfied when the normal base value in the current game section specified by the normal base value designation command is not an appropriate value or meets a notification condition that may deviate from the appropriate value. Processing for setting a notification instruction command for starting the command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing base alert notification is performed. The details of the base alert notification process will be described later. When this process ends, the current command analysis process ends.

(Base alert notification process of the effect control unit in the second embodiment)
The base alert notification process of the effect control unit 130 m in the second embodiment will be described using FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a base alert notification process of the effect control unit 130 m in the second embodiment.

  First, in step E331-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the gaming section specified by the normal base value designation command is the first gaming section. If it is not the first game section, the process moves on to step E331-2, and if it is the first game section, the present base alert notification process is ended on the assumption that the base alert notification is not performed.

  In step E331-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the normal base value of the current game section is included in the first notification range (for example, 33 to 34) which may deviate from the appropriate value. If it is included in the first notification range, the process moves to step E331-3 to execute base alert notification, and if it is not included in the first notification range, the process moves to step E331-4.

  In step E331-3, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of setting a low level alert notification instruction command for starting low level alert notification with low appeal to the gaming clerk in the base alert notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130 c. . As a result, a notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing low-level alert notification is performed.

  In the "low level alert notification", as shown in the notification mode example of the alert of the base alert notification in FIG. 77, the anomaly notification LED lights in yellow, and the image display device and the audio output device are not used. ing.

  In step E331-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the normal base value of the current game section is included in the second notification range (for example, 31 to 32) slightly deviated from the appropriate value. If it is included in the second notification range, the process moves to step E331-5 to execute base alert notification, and if it is not included in the second notification range, the process moves to step E331-6.

  Sub CPU130a, in step E331-5, processing which sets medium level alert information indication command in order to start medium level alert information of medium appeal vis-a-vis the game store clerk in the transmission buffer of sub RAM130 c in the base alert information I do. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the mid-level alert notification is performed.

  As shown in the example of the notification mode example of the base alert notification in FIG. 77, the “medium level alert notification” is configured such that the anomaly notification LED lights in red with higher appeal than yellow, and the image display device and audio output The device is not in use.

  In step E331-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the normal base value of the current game section is included in the third notification range (for example, 0 to 30) which is clearly out of the appropriate value. If it is included in the third notification range, the process moves on to step E331-7 to execute the base alert notification. If it is not included in the third notification range, the current base alert notification process is ended.

  In step E331-7, the sub CPU 130a performs processing for setting a high level alert notification instruction command for starting high level alert notification with high appeal to the gaming clerk in the base alert notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130 c. . As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing high-level alert notification is performed. When this process ends, the current base alert notification process ends.

  In the “high level alert notification”, as shown in the alert status example of the base alert notification in FIG. 77, the abnormal alert LED flashes in red and a special background image is displayed on the image display device, The audio output device is not used.

  As described above, in the main control board 110, only by transmitting the normal base value designation command, the effect control board 130 determines whether or not the normal base value satisfies the notification condition, and performs processing for performing base alert notification. It is supposed to run. Therefore, the processing load of the main control board 110 at the time of power ON is reduced, and it is possible to shorten the transition time to the game progress mode for controlling the progress of the game.

  In addition, the base alert notification is performed when the notification value that does not satisfy the notification value that the normal base value is not the appropriate value or may deviate from the appropriate value is not satisfied. Therefore, the game store side can recognize that the game nail is not in the appropriate state, and it is possible to take appropriate measures.

  Also, base alert notification with different alert levels is performed according to the appropriate level (inappropriate level) of the base value. Therefore, the game store side can recognize how much the game nail is not in an appropriate state, and it is possible to take appropriate measures.

  In the base alert notification, various error notifications (power on notification, power recovery notification, return impossible error notification, incorrect prize error notification, abnormal prize error notification, magnetic error notification, radio error notification, door open error notification, operation error Unlike the notification, the notification sound is not output. Therefore, it is possible to execute the base alert notification so that the game store side can recognize it so that it is difficult for the player to recognize, and it is possible to take appropriate measures without disturbing the player's mood.

  Although the normal base value designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the main control board 110 is in the first game zone when the power is turned on, it is determined that the main control board 110 is not the first game zone. In the case of a normal base value specification command may be sent.

  Also, although base alert notification with different alert levels is executed depending on the appropriate level (inappropriate level) of the normal base value, the alert level is the same regardless of the appropriate level (inappropriate level) of the normal base value. A base alert notification may be executed.

(Specific example when base alert notification is performed after setting change)
A specific example in the case where base alert notification (high level alert notification) is performed after setting change will be described using FIG. 78 (a). The upper side of FIG. 78 (a) is a view showing an operation example on the main control board 110 side, and the lower side is a view showing an operation example on the rendering control board 130 side.

First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the process of waiting for the activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, the activation waiting process is finished and the processing shifts to the activation processing, and at the timing T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation has been performed, the setting value is changed. Switch to setting change mode and do not send detection of setting or error. Further, a setting change in-progress signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display unit 113.

  Then, when it is detected that the setting value fixing operation has been performed at the timing of T4, the power on designation command and the normal base value designation command are sequentially transmitted to control the progress of the game ((play detection of the game ball or Process to calculate the performance information (normal information such as normal base value) by transitioning to the game progress mode in which the occurrence of an error is detected, etc. (normal in-out number counter, total out number counter, normal out number counter) Start updating). Further, when it is detected that the customer is in a wait state, a wait state specifying command is transmitted.

  At this time, the output of the power on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) is started from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 are started. The first special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display are displayed by displaying an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit) having a predetermined missing appearance. 64 is a display indicating that the number of special views is “0”, and the information display unit 113 starts lighting confirmation in which the 7-segment display is fully turned on.

  Next, at timing T5, the output of the power-on signal is stopped, and at timing T6, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses, display of performance information (normal base value) on the information display unit 113 To start. Specifically, the normal base value ("bL.「 ") Of the current game section, the normal base value of the previous game section (" b1. ○ "), the normal base of the second game section The value ("b2. ○") and the normal base value ("b3. ○") of the previous three game sections are repeatedly displayed in this order.

Next, an operation example of the effect control board 130 will be described.
First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors.

  Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting is changed to a setting change mode for changing the setting, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change-in-progress screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed.

  After that, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the transition to the effect progression mode for performing the game effect is started, and the power-on notification is started. At this time, a power-on alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white, and adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount is possible by the operation of the cross key 19. State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed.

  When the normal base value designation command indicating that the normal base value is included in the third notification range (0 to 30) is normally received, the high level alert notification described above is started. At this time, in the first image display device 70 in which the initial effect design is displayed, the background image is changed to the special background image, and the abnormality notification LED is blinked in red.

  Next, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T5 to T6, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on alarm sound passes, the output of voice from the voice output device 9 is stopped, but at this point it is high. Level alert notification will continue.

  Then, at the timing of T8, when the notification time (60 seconds) of the power on notification and the high level alert notification elapses, the power on alert and the high level alert notification end. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. In addition, the abnormality notification LED is turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70 on which the initial rendering pattern is displayed, the background image is changed to the background image of the rendering mode A.

  The flow when middle level alert notification and low level alert notification are executed is also the same as above, but when middle level alert notification is executed, the special alert image is not displayed and the error alert LED is displayed. It lights in red, and when the low level alert notification is executed, the abnormal notification LED lights in yellow without displaying the special background image.

  Thus, the base alert notification is performed after the setting change mode ends. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to surely recognize that the game nail is not in an appropriate state for the game store clerk who has performed the setting change operation, and to take appropriate measures.

  Further, the base alert notification is executed over the same period as the power on notification period, and the notification sound is not output, so that it does not overlap with the power on notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to make the base alert notification not stand out by the power on notification, and it is possible to notify that the game nail is not in the appropriate state so as not to be noticed by the player.

  In addition, since the abnormal notification LED emits light in a light emission color different from the light emission color of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 by the power-on notification, it is understood to the gaming staff that base alert notification is being executed. It becomes possible to make it easy.

(Specific example when base alert notification is performed after clearing RWM)
A specific example in the case where base alert notification (high level alert notification) is performed after RWM clear will be described using FIG. 78 (b). The upper side of FIG. 78 (b) is a view showing an operation example on the main control board 110 side, and the lower side is a view showing an operation example on the production control board 130 side.

First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the process of waiting for the activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at time T2, the process waiting for start is finished and the process proceeds to start process. At time T3, when it is detected that the RWM clear operation is performed, the predetermined area of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is cleared ( It shifts to RWM clear mode (no detection of winning of a game ball, detection of occurrence of an error, etc.) for initialization), and an RWM clear designation command is transmitted. Also, the RWM clear signal is output from the security signal terminal.

  Then, at timing T4, when it is detected that the RWM clear confirmation operation has been performed, a power on designation command and a normal base value designation command are sequentially transmitted to control the progress of the game Process to calculate the performance information (normal information such as normal base value) by transitioning to the game progress mode in which the occurrence of an error is detected, etc. (normal in-out number counter, total out number counter, normal out number counter) Start updating). Further, when it is detected that the customer is in a wait state, a wait state specifying command is transmitted.

  At this time, the output of the power on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) is started from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 are started. The first special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display are displayed by displaying an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit) having a predetermined missing appearance. 64 is a display indicating that the number of special views is “0”, and the information display unit 113 starts lighting confirmation in which the 7-segment display is fully turned on.

  Next, at timing T5, the output of the power-on signal is stopped, and at timing T6, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses, display of performance information (normal base value) on the information display unit 113 To start. Specifically, the normal base value ("bL.「 ") Of the current game section, the normal base value of the previous game section (" b1. ○ "), the normal base of the second game section The value ("b2. ○") and the normal base value ("b3. ○") of the previous three game sections are repeatedly displayed in this order.

Next, an operation example of the effect control board 130 will be described.
First, at timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors.

  Then, when the RWM clear designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to the RWM clear mode for performing the RWM clear, and the RWM clear preparation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a clear confirmation screen indicating that RWM clear is to be performed by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a is displayed.

  After that, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the transition to the effect progression mode for performing the game effect is started, and the power-on notification is started. At this time, a power-on alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9, and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white, and adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount is possible by the operation of the cross key 19. State. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed.

  When the normal base value designation command indicating that the normal base value is included in the third notification range (0 to 30) is normally received, the high level alert notification described above is started. At this time, in the first image display device 70 in which the initial effect design is displayed, the background image is changed to the special background image, and the abnormality notification LED is blinked in red.

  Next, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T5 to T6, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on alarm sound passes, the output of voice from the voice output device 9 is stopped, but at this point it is high. Level alert notification will continue.

  Then, at the timing of T8, when the notification time (60 seconds) of the power on notification and the high level alert notification elapses, the power on alert and the high level alert notification end. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. In addition, the abnormality notification LED is turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70 on which the initial rendering pattern is displayed, the background image is changed to the background image of the rendering mode A.

  The flow when middle level alert notification and low level alert notification are executed is also the same as above, but when middle level alert notification is executed, the special alert image is not displayed and the error alert LED is displayed. It lights in red, and when the low level alert notification is executed, the abnormal notification LED lights in yellow without displaying the special background image.

  Thus, the base alert notification is executed after the end of the RWM clear mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to surely recognize that the game nail is not in an appropriate state for the game store clerk who has performed the RWM clear operation, and to take appropriate measures.

  Further, the base alert notification is executed over the same period as the power on notification period, and the notification sound is not output, so that it does not overlap with the power on notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to make the base alert notification not stand out by the power on notification, and it is possible to notify that the game nail is not in the appropriate state so as not to be noticed by the player.

  In addition, since the abnormal notification LED emits light in a light emission color different from the light emission color of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 by the power-on notification, it is understood to the gaming staff that base alert notification is being executed. It becomes possible to make it easy.

(Specific example when base alert notification is performed after setting confirmation)
A specific example in the case where base alert notification (high level alert notification) is performed after setting confirmation will be described using FIG. 79 (a). The upper side of FIG. 79 (a) is a view showing an operation example on the main control board 110 side, and the lower side is a view showing an operation example on the production control board 130 side.

First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the process of waiting for the activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, the process for waiting for activation is completed and the process proceeds to the activation process. At the timing T3, when it is detected that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, the setting value saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c The control mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode (no detection of winning of the game ball, detection of occurrence of error, etc.) for confirming the setting ball, and a setting confirmation designation command is transmitted. In addition, a setting confirmation signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display unit 113.

  Then, when it is detected that the confirmation termination operation has been performed at the timing of T4, the power recovery designation command and the normal base value designation command are sequentially transmitted to control the progress of the game (a detection of a winning by the game ball or an error) Processing is performed to detect the occurrence of the game) and the processing to calculate performance information (normal information such as a base value) (normal middle payout number counter, total out number counter, normal middle number out counter) Start updating). Further, when it is detected that the customer is in a wait state, a wait state specifying command is transmitted.

  At this time, output of the power-on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) from the security signal terminal is started, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 are started. The first special symbol holding display 63 and the second special symbol holding display are displayed by displaying an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit) which is a predetermined missing issue. The display 64 indicates that the number of special views is “0”, and the information display unit 113 starts lighting confirmation in which the 7-segment display is fully turned on.

  Next, at timing T5, the output of the power supply recovery signal is stopped, and at timing T6, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses, display of the performance information (normal base value) on the information display unit 113 To start. Specifically, the normal base value ("bL.「 ") Of the current game section, the normal base value of the previous game section (" b1. ○ "), the normal base of the second game section The value ("b2. ○") and the normal base value ("b3. ○") of the previous three game sections are repeatedly displayed in this order.

Next, an operation example of the effect control board 130 will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing T1, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors.

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode is changed to the setting change mode for performing setting confirmation, and setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting confirmation in-progress screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the transition to the effect progression mode for performing a game effect is performed, and the power recovery notification is started. At this time, the power recovery notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white, and adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount is possible by the operation of the cross key 19. State. Then, the first image display device 70 displays a power supply recovery screen indicating that the power supply has been restored.

  When the normal base value designation command indicating that the normal base value is included in the third notification range (0 to 30) is normally received, the high level alert notification described above is started. At this time, the background image of the first image display device 70 on which the power recovery screen is displayed is changed to a special background image, and the abnormality notification LED is blinked in red.

  Then, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T6, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power supply recovery alarm sound passes, the output of the audio from the audio output device 9 is stopped, but at this time the high level alert notification Will continue. Specifically, the power recovery screen ends, and a special screen consisting of a special background image and an initial effect pattern "123" is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T8, when the notification time (60 seconds) of the power supply recovery notification and the high level alert notification elapses, the power on notification and the high level alert notification end. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. In addition, the abnormality notification LED is turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70 on which the special background image is displayed, the background image is changed to the background image of the effect mode A.

  The flow when middle level alert notification and low level alert notification are executed is also the same as above, but when middle level alert notification is executed, the special alert image is not displayed and the error alert LED is displayed. It lights in red, and when the low level alert notification is executed, the abnormal notification LED lights in yellow without displaying the special background image.

  As described above, the base alert notification is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to surely recognize that the game nail is not in an appropriate state for the game store clerk who has performed the setting confirmation operation, and to take appropriate measures.

  Further, the base alert notification is executed over the same period as the power supply recovery notification period, and by not outputting the notification sound, it is not covered with the power recovery notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to make the base alert notification not stand out by the power supply recovery notification, and it is possible to notify that the game nail is not in the appropriate state so as not to be noticed by the player.

  In addition, since the abnormal notification LED emits light in a light emission color different from the light emission color of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 by the power supply recovery notification, it is known to the gaming staff that base alert notification is being executed. It becomes possible to make it easy.

(Specific example when base alert notification is performed after power recovery)
A specific example in the case where base alert notification (high level alert notification) is performed after power supply recovery will be described using FIG. 79 (b). The upper side of FIG. 79 (b) is a view showing an operation example on the main control board 110 side, and the lower side is a view showing an operation example on the side of the effect control board 130.

First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the process of waiting for the activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at time T2, the process waits for start-up and ends the process. Then, at time T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation are not performed, Transfer to the game progress mode (the game ball is detected to detect the winning of the game ball or the occurrence of an error is detected) by transmitting the recovery specification command and the normal base value specification command in order to control the progress of the game. A process for calculating historical information such as a value or the like (update of the middle payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal middle out number counter) is started. Further, when it is detected that the customer is in a wait state, a wait state specifying command is transmitted.

  At this time, in the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62, an initial symbol which is a predetermined missing eye (for example, a plurality of symbols constituting the display) The first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold indicator 64 indicate that the number of special views is "0", and the information indicator 113 is displayed. Then, the lighting confirmation to start all lighting of the 7-segment display is started.

  Then, at the timing T4, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the performance information (normal base value) on the information display 113 is started. Specifically, the normal base value ("bL.「 ") Of the current game section, the normal base value of the previous game section (" b1. ○ "), the normal base of the second game section The value ("b2. ○") and the normal base value ("b3. ○") of the previous three game sections are repeatedly displayed in this order.

Next, an operation example of the effect control board 130 will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing T1, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors.

  Then, when the power recovery specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the transition to the effect progression mode for performing the game effect is started, and the power recovery notification is started. At this time, the power recovery notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white, and adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount is possible by the operation of the cross key 19. State. Then, on the first image display device 70, a power recovery screen is displayed indicating that the power is restored.

  When the normal base value designation command indicating that the normal base value is included in the third notification range (0 to 30) is normally received, the high level alert notification described above is started. At this time, the background image of the first image display device 70 on which the power recovery screen is displayed is changed to a special background image, and the abnormality notification LED is blinked in red.

  Then, at the timing of T5 after the timing of T4, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration alarm sound passes, the output of the audio from the audio output device 9 is stopped, but at this point, the high level alert notification Will continue. Specifically, the power recovery screen ends, and a special screen consisting of a special background image and an initial effect pattern "123" is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of T6, when the notification time (60 seconds) of the power supply recovery notification and the high level alert notification elapses, the power on notification and the high level alert notification end. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started. In addition, the abnormality notification LED is turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70 on which the special background image is displayed, the background image is changed to the background image of the effect mode A.

  The flow when middle level alert notification and low level alert notification are executed is also the same as above, but when middle level alert notification is executed, the special alert image is not displayed and the error alert LED is displayed. It lights in red, and when the low level alert notification is executed, the abnormal notification LED lights in yellow without displaying the special background image.

  As described above, the base alert notification is performed immediately after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to surely recognize that the game nail is not in an appropriate state for the game shop clerk who has powered on the game machine, and to take appropriate measures.

  Further, the base alert notification is executed over the same period as the power supply recovery notification period, and by not outputting the notification sound, it is not covered with the power recovery notification sound. Therefore, it is possible to make the base alert notification not stand out by the power supply recovery notification, and it is possible to notify that the game nail is not in the appropriate state so as not to be noticed by the player.

  In addition, since the abnormal notification LED emits light in a light emission color different from the light emission color of the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 by the power supply recovery notification, it is known to the gaming staff that base alert notification is being executed. It becomes possible to make it easy.

  Note that the notification time (60 seconds) of the base alert notification and the notification time (60 seconds) by the frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 74 in the power on notification or power recovery notification are the same, but the base The notification time of the alert notification may be extended or shortened. Moreover, when shortening the alerting | reporting time of base alert alerting | reporting, you may make it the same as the output time (30 second) of a power activation alarm | sound.

  In addition, when any of high level alert notification, medium level alert notification, and low level alert notification is executed in the base alert notification, the notification time by the error alert LED is the same, but it differs depending on the alert level. You may Specifically, it is preferable that the notification time by the abnormality notification LED be longer as the alert level is higher. In this case, the notification time by the special background image in the high level alert notification may be adjusted to the notification time by the abnormality notification LED.

  Also, when performing a base alert notification, no alert sound is output, but if the alert level is high, or if the alert level is medium and high, a base alert notification sound (for example, You may output "). In this case, the power on notification sound and the power recovery notification sound may be alternately output as the base alert notification sound so that the power on notification sound and the power recovery notification sound do not overlap.

(Example 1 in the case of an unrecoverable error)
With reference to FIG. 80 (a), a specific example in the case where an RWM abnormality occurs when the power is turned on and a return impossible error occurs will be described. The upper side of FIG. 80 (a) is a view showing an operation example on the main control board 110 side, and the lower side is a view showing an operation example on the production control board 130 side.

First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the process of waiting for the activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at time T2, the process waiting for start is finished and the process shifts to start process, and at time T3, after detecting that the setting change operation has not been performed, the data in the RWM area is abnormal ( When the occurrence of RWM abnormality is detected, a return impossible error designation command is transmitted (no detection of winning of the game ball, detection of occurrence of error, etc. is performed), and the process shifts to return impossible error processing.

  At this time, the output of the non-returnable error signal from the security signal terminal is started, and the information display 113 displays error information ("Er. FF") indicating the occurrence of the non-returnable error. Wait until the power is turned off.

  Thereafter, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off at timing T4, the output of the non-returnable error signal is stopped and the information display 113 is not displayed, and the operation of the main control board 110 is stopped.

Next, an operation example of the effect control board 130 will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing T1, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors.

  Then, when the non-returnable error designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the mode shifts to an error mode for giving an error notification and the non-returnable error notification is started. At this time, the return impossible error sound is output from the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in red, and the first image display device 70 displays a return impossible error screen. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off at timing T4, the return impossible error notification is ended, and the operation of the effect control board 130 is stopped.

(Specific example 2 in the case of an unrecoverable error)
With reference to FIG. 80 (b), a specific example in the case where a return impossible error will occur due to the power being turned ON during the setting change processing will be described. The upper side of FIG. 80 (b) is a view showing an operation example on the main control board 110 side, and the lower side is a view showing an operation example on the production control board 130 side.

First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the process of waiting for the activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, the activation waiting process is finished and the processing shifts to the activation processing, and at the timing T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation has been performed, the setting value is changed. Switch to setting change mode and do not send detection of setting or error. Further, a setting change in-progress signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display unit 113.

  Then, at timing T4, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the output of the setting change in-progress signal is stopped, the information display 113 is not displayed, and the setting change in progress flag is saved in the RWM area. Operation of the main control board 110 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the power supply of the gaming machine is turned on again at timing T5, processing for waiting for activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at time T6, the process waits for start-up and ends the process. Then, at time T7, after detecting that the setting change operation has not been performed, the setting change flag is saved in the RWM area. When it is detected that it has been detected, a return impossible error designation command is transmitted to shift to a return impossible error processing (no detection of winning of the game ball, detection of occurrence of an error, etc. is performed).

  At this time, the output of the non-returnable error signal from the security signal terminal is started, and the information display 113 displays error information ("Er. FF") indicating the occurrence of the non-returnable error. Wait until the power is turned off.

  Thereafter, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off at timing T8, the output of the non-returnable error signal is stopped, the information display 113 is not displayed, and the operation of the main control board 110 is stopped.

Next, an operation example of the effect control board 130 will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing T1, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Then, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors.

  In addition, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting is changed to the setting change mode for changing the setting, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change-in-progress screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed.

  Next, at time T4, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting change notification is ended, and the operation of the effect control board 130 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on again at timing T5, the activation processing is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Then, at the timing T6, when the start-up process ends, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors.

  Next, at timing T7, when the non-returnable error designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the mode shifts to an error mode for error notification and the non-returnable error notification is started. At this time, the return impossible error sound is output from the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in red, and the first image display device 70 displays a return impossible error screen. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off at timing T8, the return impossible error notification is ended and the operation of the effect control board 130 is stopped.

  As described above, when a non-recoverable error occurs, a non-recoverable error specification command is transmitted without transmitting the power on designation command, the power recovery specification command, the normal base value designation command, etc. ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify of the occurrence of the return impossible error without executing an unnecessary notification on the side of the effect control board.

  In addition, both the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 are notified of the occurrence of the non-returnable error. Therefore, for example, even if an abnormality occurs in which the notification on the main control substrate 110 side and the notification on the effect control substrate 130 are different due to the command transmitted from the main control substrate 110 to the effect control substrate 130 becoming another command, By checking the information display 113, it is possible to determine whether or not an unrecoverable error has occurred.

  In addition, if the power is turned off during the setting change process that involves clearing (initialization) of the RWM area, a non-returnable error will occur if the setting change operation is not performed at the next power on. (It is an unrecoverable error even if an RWM clear operation or a setting confirmation operation is performed). Therefore, the progress control of the game is not performed in a state where the reliability of the data in the RWM area can not be secured, and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Modification of base alert notification)
A modification of the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the present modification, a base alert notification is performed during the setting change mode by outputting the normal base value specifying command following the setting change specifying command. The upper side of FIG. 81 is a view showing an operation example on the main control board 110 side, and the lower side is a view showing an operation example on the production control board 130 side.

First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the process of waiting for the activation of another substrate is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the normal symbol display 62, the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold The display 64, the normal symbol hold display 65, and the information display 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, the activation waiting process is finished and the processing shifts to the activation processing, and at the timing T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation has been performed, the setting value is changed. Move to setting change mode, and do not send setting change specification command and normal base value specification command in order. Further, a setting change in-progress signal is output from the security signal terminal, and the current setting value (one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display unit 113.

  Then, when it is detected that the setting value fixing operation has been performed at the timing of T4, the power on designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (such as detection of winning of the game ball and detection of occurrence of error etc. The game progress mode is entered, and processing for calculating performance information (normal history information such as a base value) is started (updating the middle payout number counter, the total out number counter, and the normal middle out number counter). Further, when it is detected that the customer is in a wait state, a wait state specifying command is transmitted.

  At this time, the output of the power on signal for a predetermined time (256 milliseconds) is started from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, and the normal symbol display 62 are started. The first special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display are displayed by displaying an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit) having a predetermined missing appearance. 64 is a display indicating that the number of special views is “0”, and the information display unit 113 starts lighting confirmation in which the 7-segment display is fully turned on.

  Next, at timing T5, the output of the power-on signal is stopped, and at timing T6, when the lighting confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses, display of performance information (normal base value) on the information display unit 113 To start. Specifically, the normal base value ("bL.「 ") Of the current game section, the normal base value of the previous game section (" b1. ○ "), the normal base of the second game section The value ("b2. ○") and the normal base value ("b3. ○") of the previous three game sections are repeatedly displayed in this order.

Next, an operation example of the effect control board 130 will be described.
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing T1, the activation process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the sound output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of volume initial value) Also, adjustment (setting) of the volume and the light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 is also impossible. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing T2, when the start-up process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, it is possible to switch the adjustment mode (set the volume initial value) by the operation of the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is displayed together with the color bars of seven colors.

  Then, when the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting is changed to a setting change mode for changing the setting, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 light in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change-in-progress screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed.

  When the normal base value designation command indicating that the normal base value transmitted from the main control board 110 is included in the third notification range (0 to 30) is normally received, the high level alert notification described above is started. Do. At this time, the abnormality notification LED blinks in red, and the background image of the setting changing screen is changed to the special background image, and the special setting changing screen is displayed.

  After that, when the power on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, the high level alert notification is ended, and the transition to the progression mode for performing the game effect is performed, and the power on notification is performed. Start. At this time, a power on alarm sound is output from the audio output device 9 and the frame illumination device 10 and the panel illumination device 74 are lit in white, and the abnormality alert LED is turned off. The light amount can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to the normal screen (screen for effect), and when the power is turned on (low probability non-permanent short game state), the initial effect symbol "135" common or power on (low probability non-time short game state) The background image etc. of presentation mode A which is common at the time are displayed.

  Next, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T5 to T6, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on alarm sound passes, the output of voice from the voice output device 9 is stopped.

  Then, at the timing of T8, when the notification time (60 seconds) of the power on notification has elapsed, the power on notification is ended. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decoration light emission which is easy to recognize that it is a customer waiting state is started.

  The flow when middle level alert notification and low level alert notification are executed is also the same as above, but when middle level alert notification is executed, the special alert image is not displayed and the error alert LED is displayed. It lights in red, and when the low level alert notification is executed, the abnormal notification LED lights in yellow without displaying the special background image.

  In addition, although an example in which the base alert notification is executed during the setting change mode has been described here, when transitioning to the RWM clear mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on, the base during the RWM clear mode or the setting confirmation mode Alert notification will be executed. The flow in that case is also the same as when base alert notification is executed during the setting change mode.

  Thus, the base alert notification is performed during the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the base alert notification can be executed without disturbing the player's mood, and the game store side can appropriately take measures.

  Further, the base alert notification is not executed when the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode are not shifted, that is, when the predetermined operation is not performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Therefore, the gaming shop side can select the presence or absence of the base alert notification, and the convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

  It should be noted that the base alert notification may be any notification mode that is difficult for the player to notice, and the first image display device 70 is not used to display the special background image on the first image display device 70 to execute the base alert notification. The base alert notification may be performed by displaying a special icon on the screen, or the base alert notification may be performed by changing the color of the character image displayed on the first image display device 70 to a special color. Good.

  In addition, instead of causing the abnormality notification LED to emit light in a predetermined manner to execute the base alert notification, the whole or a part of the frame illumination device 10 and / or the panel illumination device 74 is emitted in a predetermined manner Alert notification may be performed. In this case, the light emission color may be different from that at the time of power on notification, power recovery notification, setting change notification, RWM clear notification, and setting confirmation notification.

(Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, it is common that a predetermined amount of gaming value is awarded as a prize to a player when the award condition is satisfied by the game using the gaming value. Among such gaming machines, there have been gaming machines that display information indicating the setting value (theoretical value) of gaming machine performance on a display device (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116898). However, in this gaming machine, only the setting value (theoretical value) of the performance of the gaming machine is displayed, and there is a problem that the actual performance (measured value) of the gaming machine can not be grasped.

  As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a condition using a game value (a game medium such as a game ball or a medal), an award condition (the entry of the game ball to various winning openings, a pay line) A state control means (main control board) capable of controlling any of a plurality of gaming states in a gaming machine capable of giving a player a predetermined amount of gaming value as a prize when a winning symbol alignment is satisfied. 110), zone switching means (main control board 110) capable of switching the game zone according to the execution of the game, and the amount of used gaming value while in a predetermined gaming state in one game zone (normally Information calculation means (main control board) capable of calculating specific game information using the number of outs) and the amount of granted game value (the number of normal payouts), and the specific game information in the current game section is notified Condition (Normal Includes a specific notification to satisfy the value "33" or less) (based alert notification) can be of executing notification executing means (performance control board 130), the. By doing this, it becomes possible to grasp the actual performance (measured value) of the gaming machine.

(Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of giving gaming benefits (a prize ball, a medal, value data, etc.) according to the result of the game is generally used. Among such gaming machines, there have been gaming machines that display information indicating the setting value (theoretical value) of gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, JP-A-2016-116898). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent documents, the gaming machine performance is determined in advance, and there is a problem that the advantage of the gaming can not be changed.

  As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing a game, and the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); Specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, number of out in normal, number of out in normal) to be calculated in order to calculate specific information (usually base value); 113), and transmission means for transmitting the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, the effect control means comprising , Said (1) A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) in response to reception of control information, and the award control means determines the winning area while the setting change image is displayed. When a game medium (game balls, medals) is won in (various winning openings, various starting openings), the above-mentioned grant control by the winning is not performed, and the specific information calculation means performs the above-mentioned setting change image during display When the game medium has won in the winning area, the specific information is not calculated by the winning. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing a game, and the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); Specific information calculation means for collecting game information (total number of outs, number of out in normal, number of out in normal) to be calculated in order to calculate specific information (usually base value); 113), and transmission means for transmitting the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, the effect control means comprising , Said (1) A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) in response to reception of control information, and the award control means determines the winning area while the setting change image is displayed. When a game medium (game balls, medals) is won in (various winning openings, various starting openings), the above-mentioned grant control by the winning is not performed, and the specific information calculation means performs the above-mentioned setting change image during display When the game medium has won in the winning area, the game information is not collected by the winning. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing a game, and an application control means (payout control board 120) for performing an application control of game benefits (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the application information (command) transmitted from the game control means And the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) Winning determination means for determining whether or not the game medium (game ball, medal) has won, and the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state Send Transmitting means, and the effect control means causes the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (screen under setting change) in response to the reception of the first control information, The game control means is configured to limit execution of the winning determination when being controlled to the setting change state, and to control execution of the winning determination after completion of the setting change state. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting change means for controlling the game control means to a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power on designation command) is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. A transmission unit that transmits the second control information, and the effect control unit displays a setting change image (a setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the first control information, and the second control information With the reception of If the display of the setting change image is ended and the second control information is not received normally during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is displayed even if the setting change state is ended. It is supposed to continue. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means The effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing the game, and the application control means for performing the application control of the game benefits (prize ball, award medals) based on the application information (command) transmitted from the game control means, The game control means controls setting change means for controlling to a setting change state which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the first effect control means controls the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. Transmitting means for transmitting information (setting change designation command) and transmitting the second control information (power on designation command) to the effect control means upon termination of the setting change state; and game information (total address) generated in the game Specific information calculation means for collecting specific information (normal base value) by collecting the normal number of outs, the number of normal out payouts, and specifying the specific information to be displayed on the information display unit (information display unit 113) Information display means, and the effect control means causes the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (screen under setting change) in response to the reception of the first control information; The display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and when the second control information is not properly received during the display of the setting change image, the setting change state is ended. Even if the display of the setting change image is continued, the application control means is controlled to the setting change state, and the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) is displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. ) To the game medium (game ball, When the dull) wins, the above-mentioned grant control due to the said winning is not done, after the end of the aforementioned setting modification state, when the aforementioned game media wins in the aforementioned winning a prize territory while displaying the aforementioned setting modification picture, it is concerned The application control by winning is performed, and the specific information calculating unit is controlled to the setting change state, and when the game medium is in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed, If the game medium does not calculate the specific information by winning, but after the setting change state is over and the setting change image is displayed, the specific information is calculated by the winning. Is supposed to do. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing a game, and an application control means (payout control board 120) for performing an application control of game benefits (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the application information (command) transmitted from the game control means And the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the effect according to the start of the setting change state. Transmitting means for transmitting the first control information (setting change designation command) to the control means, and transmitting the second control information (power on designation command) to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state; Specific information calculation means for collecting the game information (total number of outs, number of out in normal, number of out in normal) to calculate specific information (usually base value), and the specific information in the information display section (information display unit 113 ), And the effect control means is configured to change the setting image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. ), The display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and the setting is not received normally when the second control information is not received during the display of the setting change image. Even when the change state is ended, the display of the setting change image is continued, and the award control means is controlled to the setting change state, and the winning area (various prizes are displayed while the setting change image is displayed. Mouth, various starting openings When a game medium (game ball, medal) has won a prize, the award control by the prize is not performed, and after the end of the setting change state, the game medium is displayed in the prize area while the setting change image is displayed. When the player wins a prize, the award control by the prize is performed, and the specific information calculation unit is in the setting change state, and the game medium is in the prize area while the setting change image is displayed. When the player wins a prize, the gaming information is not collected by the prize, and the gaming medium is prized in the prize area after the setting change state is over and the setting change image is displayed. The game information is collected by winning. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a seventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing a game, and an application control means (payout control board 120) for performing an application control of game benefits (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the application information (command) transmitted from the game control means And the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) Winning determination means for performing a winning determination of whether the game medium has won or not, and transmitting the first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, the setting Letter of change And transmission means for transmitting the second control information (power on designation command) to the effect control means in accordance with the end of the step, the effect control means comprising a predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the first control information. (A first image display device 70) displays a setting change image (setting changing screen), and with the reception of the second control information, ends the display of the setting change image, and during display of the setting change image When the second control information is not properly received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the game control means is controlled to the setting change state. When the execution of the winning determination is limited, the execution of the winning determination can be controlled after the end of the setting change state. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As an eighth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting change means for controlling the game control means to a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power on designation command) is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. A sound output unit for producing a game effect based on the volume control operation (the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. (sound The volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the output device 9) to a predetermined volume, and the setting change image on the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. (Displaying the setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and the setting of the volume is impossible while the setting change image is displayed, After the display of the setting change image is finished, the setting of the sound volume is possible. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a ninth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting change means for controlling the game control means to a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power on designation command) is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. And the effect control means is a light emitting unit for effecting a game based on the fact that the light amount adjusting operation (the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) has been performed by the player. For frame The apparatus includes a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light to be emitted by the bright device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device to a predetermined light amount, and predetermined display upon reception of the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the unit (first image display device 70), and the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the setting changing image is displayed. Is a state in which the setting of the light amount is impossible, and after the display of the setting change image is finished, the setting of the light amount is possible. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a tenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) which controls the progress of the game, and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting change means for controlling the game control means to a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power on designation command) is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. A sound output unit for producing a game effect based on the volume control operation (the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. ( Based on the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9) to a predetermined volume and the fact that the light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player is Light quantity setting means for setting the light quantity of the effect light for causing the light emission part (the frame illumination device 10, the panel illumination device 74, and the backlight of the image display device) to perform [1] Display a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to reception of control information, and display of the setting change image in response to reception of the second control information And the setting of the volume and the light quantity can not be performed while the setting change image is displayed, and the setting of the volume and the light quantity is possible after the display of the setting change image is ended. . By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As an eleventh configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting change means for controlling the game control means to a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power on designation command) is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. A sound output unit for producing a game effect based on the volume control operation (the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. ( The voice output device 9) includes volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to a predetermined volume, and the setting is changed in the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. An image (setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and the second control information is not properly received while the setting change image is displayed. In this case, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the setting of the sound volume is impossible while the setting change image is being displayed. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twelfth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting change means for controlling the game control means to a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power on designation command) is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. And the effect control means is a light emitting unit for effecting a game based on the fact that the light amount adjusting operation (the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) has been performed by the player. frame The apparatus comprises a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light to be emitted to the lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device to a predetermined light amount, and predetermined display upon reception of the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the unit (first image display device 70), and the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the setting changing image is displayed. If the second control information is not properly received in the display, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the setting of the light amount is not performed while the setting change image is displayed. It is possible. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting change means for controlling the game control means to a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power on designation command) is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. A sound output unit for producing a game effect based on the volume control operation (the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. ( Based on the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9) to a predetermined volume and the fact that the light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player is Light quantity setting means for setting the light quantity of the effect light for causing the light emission part (the frame illumination device 10, the panel illumination device 74, and the backlight of the image display device) to perform [1] Display a setting change image (setting changing screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to reception of control information, and display of the setting change image in response to reception of the second control information If the second control information is not properly received during display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the setting change While the image is displayed Settings of the serial volume and the amount of light is in a state impossible. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing a game, and an application control means (payout control board 120) for performing an application control of game benefits (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the application information (command) transmitted from the game control means And, the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a start changing condition (starting condition (winning of game medium to start opening) Based on the establishment of the variable symbol display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and upon the start of the setting change state, transmitting the first control information (setting change specification command) to the effect control means, Said The second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the fixed change state, and the third control information (fluctuation start command is sent to the effect control means with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol. ), Transmission information for transmitting game information (total number of outs, number of out in normal, number of out in normal), and specific information calculation means for calculating specific information (normal base value); Specific information display means for displaying information on the information display unit (information display unit 113), and the effect control means is configured to display a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receipt of the first control information. ) Displays the setting change image (setting changing screen), and ends the display of the setting change image with the reception of the second control information, and the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information. The fluctuation display of the production design with If the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended. The application control means is controlled to the setting change state, and a game medium (game ball, medal) is won in a winning area (various winning ports, various start ports) while the setting change image is displayed. In the case where the awarding control by the prize is not performed, and the game medium is prized in the prize area while the setting change image is displayed after the setting change state is ended, the awarding control by the prize is performed. If the game medium is in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed while the specific information calculating means is being controlled to the setting change state, the special If the game medium is winning in the winning area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed without calculating the fixed information, the specific information is calculated by the winning, When the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information but normally receives the third control information while displaying the setting change image, the effect control means displays the setting change image. It is made to end and start the change display of the above-mentioned production design. In addition, game control means (main control board 110) which controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130) which controls the effect of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means , And the game control means includes setting change means for controlling the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a start condition (winning of game medium to start opening) Based on the establishment, the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol), and the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the setting The second control information (power on designation command) is sent to the effect control means with the end of the change state, and the third control information (variation start command) is sent to the effect control means with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol. Send Transmitting means, specific information calculating means for collecting game information (total number of outs, number of normal outs, number of normal out payouts) generated in the game and calculating specific information (normal base value), and information of the specific information A display unit (information display unit 113) for displaying specific information, and the effect control unit is set in a predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. A change image (setting change screen) is displayed, and the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and in response to the reception of the third control information, the predetermined display portion effects the design symbol When the second variable information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the setting change image is displayed even if the setting change state is ended. Continue the above-mentioned grant control When the game medium (gaming ball, medal) has been won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting change image is being controlled, and the stage is being controlled to the setting change state, If the game medium has won a prize in the prize area while the setting change state is ended and the setting change image is displayed without performing the award control by the prize, the award control by the prize is performed, The specific information calculation means calculates the specific information by the winning when the game medium is winning in the winning area while the setting change state is being controlled and the setting change image is being displayed. If the game medium has won in the pay area during the display of the setting change image without performing the setting change state, the specific information is calculated by the winning, and the game control is performed. The means causes the variable display of the symbol to start when the start condition is satisfied after the setting change state is over and the setting change image is displayed, and the effect control means is configured to control the second control information. When the variable display of the symbol is started while the setting change image is being displayed without properly receiving the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing a game, and an application control means (payout control board 120) for performing an application control of game benefits (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the application information (command) transmitted from the game control means And, the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a start changing condition (starting condition (winning of game medium to start opening) Based on the establishment of the variable symbol display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and upon the start of the setting change state, transmitting the first control information (setting change specification command) to the effect control means, Said The second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the fixed change state, and the third control information (fluctuation start command is sent to the effect control means with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol. ), Transmission information for transmitting game information (total number of outs, number of out in normal, number of out in normal), and specific information calculation means for calculating specific information (normal base value); Specific information display means for displaying information on the information display unit (information display unit 113), and the effect control means is configured to display a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receipt of the first control information. ) Displays the setting change image (setting changing screen), and ends the display of the setting change image with the reception of the second control information, and the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information. The fluctuation display of the production design with If the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended. The application control means is controlled to the setting change state, and a game medium (game ball, medal) is won in a winning area (various winning ports, various start ports) while the setting change image is displayed. In the case where the awarding control by the prize is not performed, and the game medium is prized in the prize area while the setting change image is displayed after the setting change state is ended, the awarding control by the prize is performed. And the specific information calculating unit is controlled to the setting change state, and when the game medium is in the winning area during the display of the setting change image, the play by the winning is performed. If the game medium has won in the winning area after the setting change state is ended and the setting change image is displayed without collecting the technique information, the game information is collected by the winning, When the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information but normally receives the third control information while displaying the setting change image, the effect control means displays the setting change image. It is made to end and start the change display of the above-mentioned production design. In addition, game control means (main control board 110) which controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130) which controls the effect of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means And provision control means (disbursement control board 120) for performing addition control of a game privilege (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the provision information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means The setting change means for controlling the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the establishment of the start condition (winning of gaming media to the starting opening) of symbols (special symbols) The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means along with the start of the setting change state, and the change control means performs the variable display, and the effect control is performed according to the end of the setting change state. hand Transmitting means for transmitting the second control information (power on designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol, and the transmission means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command) Specific information calculating means for collecting information (total number of outs, normal number of outs, normal number of payouts) and calculating specific information (normal base value), and the specific information to the information display unit (information display unit 113) Specific information display means to be displayed, wherein the effect control means causes the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) to carry out the setting change image (screen under setting change) in response to the reception of the first control information. It is displayed, and the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect design is started on the predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the third control information. Let the settings change image If the second control information is not properly received during display, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the application control means controls the setting change state. If the game medium (game ball, medal) is won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting change image is being displayed, the above-described provision control by the winning is not performed. After the setting change state is over, when the game medium is in the winning area during the display of the setting change image, the application control by the winning is performed, and the specific information calculation unit When the game medium is in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed when the game medium is controlled to the change state, the game information is not collected by the winning, and the setting change state is After the end, when the game medium is prized in the prize area while the setting change image is being displayed, the game information is collected by the prize, and the game control means is configured to end the setting change state. And when the start condition is satisfied during display of the setting change image, the variable display of the symbol is started, and the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information, and the setting change When the variable display of the symbol is started while the image is displayed, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Effect control means (effect control board 130) for performing a game, and an application control means (payout control board 120) for performing an application control of game benefits (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the application information (command) transmitted from the game control means And, the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a start changing condition (starting condition (winning of game medium to start opening) Based on the establishment of the variable symbol display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and upon the start of the setting change state, transmitting the first control information (setting change specification command) to the effect control means, Said The second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the fixed change state, and the third control information (fluctuation start command is sent to the effect control means with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol. And transmission determining means for determining whether or not a game medium (game ball, medal) has won in a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings), The control means causes the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (screen under setting change) in response to the reception of the first control information, and in response to the reception of the second control information. The display of the setting change image is ended, and in response to the reception of the third control information, the fluctuation display (the fluctuation effect) of the rendering symbol is started on the predetermined display unit, and the second one is displayed during the display of the setting change image. While receiving control information normally In this case, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the game control means restricts the execution of the winning determination when the setting change state is being controlled, It is possible to control execution of the winning a prize determination after the end of the setting change state, and the effect control means may not receive the second control information normally and display the setting change image. When the control information is properly received, the display of the setting change image is ended and the variable display of the effect pattern is started. In addition, game control means (main control board 110) which controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130) which controls the effect of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means And provision control means (disbursement control board 120) for performing addition control of a game privilege (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the provision information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means The setting change means for controlling the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the establishment of the start condition (winning of gaming media to the starting opening) of symbols (special symbols) The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means along with the start of the setting change state, and the change control means performs the variable display, and the effect control is performed according to the end of the setting change state. hand Transmitting means for transmitting the second control information (power on designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol and the third control information (variation start command) to the effect control means; A prize determining means for executing a prize determination of whether or not a game medium (game ball, medal) has been prized in a prize opening, various starting openings, and the effect control means receives the first control information. At the same time, a setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70), and the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information. (3) When the variable display (variation effect) of the effect design is started on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the control information, and the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, The setting change state has ended Also, the display of the setting change image is continued, and the game control means restricts the execution of the winning judgment when being controlled to the setting changing state, and the execution of the winning judgment after the setting changing state is ended. Is controlled, and after the end of the setting change state, when the start condition is satisfied during display of the setting change image, variation display of the symbol is started, and the effect control means (2) When the variable display of the symbol is started without properly receiving the control information, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting change means for controlling a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start control Variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on satisfaction of the condition (winning of gaming media to the starting opening), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state (A setting change designation command) is transmitted, and the second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is displayed with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol. Control means Transmitting means for transmitting the third control information (the change start command) to the game, the effect control means playing the game based on the volume adjustment operation (the operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) by the player. A sound volume setting unit for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the sound output unit (audio output device 9) for performing the effect of the sound volume to a predetermined sound volume, and the predetermined display unit A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and in response to the reception of the third control information. If the second display information is not properly received while the variation display (variation effect) of the effect design is started on the predetermined display unit and the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state is ended. Even if the setting is changed The display of the image is continued, and while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting of the volume is impossible, and the setting change image is displayed while the second control information is not properly received. When the third control information is properly received, the display of the setting change image is ended and the variable display of the effect pattern is started, and after the start of the variable display of the effect pattern, the volume can be set State. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting change means for controlling a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start control Variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on satisfaction of the condition (winning of gaming media to the starting opening), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state (A setting change designation command) is transmitted, and the second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is displayed with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol. Control means Transmission means for transmitting third control information (variation start command), wherein the effect control means is for playing a game based on the fact that the light amount adjustment operation (the operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) by the player A light quantity setting means for setting the light quantity of the effect light for causing the light emitting part (the frame illumination device 10, the panel illumination device 74, the backlight of the image display device) to perform the effect to be a predetermined light intensity. A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of control information, and the setting change image is displayed in response to the reception of the second control information. End, and in response to the reception of the third control information, cause the predetermined display unit to start displaying the variation of the rendering symbol (variation rendering), and normally receive the second control information during the display of the setting change image. If not, The display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the setting of the light amount is impossible while the setting change image is being displayed, and the second control information is normally received. If the third control information is properly received while the setting change image is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended and the variable display of the effect pattern is started, and the effect pattern is displayed. After the start of the variable display of, the light amount can be set. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting change means for controlling a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start control Variable display means for executing variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on satisfaction of the condition (winning of gaming media to the starting opening), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state (A setting change designation command) is transmitted, and the second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is displayed with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol. Control means Transmission means for transmitting third control information (variation start command), and the effect control means is for playing a game based on the fact that the player has made a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19) The volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the sound output unit (voice output device 9) for performing the effect to a predetermined volume, and the light amount adjustment operation by the player (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) Based on the presence of light, a light quantity for setting the light quantity of the effect light to light the light emitting part (the frame illumination device 10, the panel illumination device 74, the back light of the image display device) for performing the game effect Setting means for displaying a setting change image (screen under setting change) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information, and receiving the second control information Together with the The display of the change image is ended, and in response to the reception of the third control information, the fluctuation display (the fluctuation effect) of the effect pattern is started on the predetermined display unit, and the second control information is displayed while the setting change image is displayed. Is not normally received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is ended, and the setting of the volume and the light amount can not be performed while the setting change image is being displayed. If the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed without properly receiving the second control information, the display of the setting change image is ended. The variable display of the effect pattern is started, and after the start of the variable display of the effect pattern, the volume and the light amount can be set. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twentieth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game bonus (a prize is awarded based on game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progression of the game and the additional information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a first information storage unit (main RAM 110c) for storing storage information associated with the progress control, the game control unit further comprising: an application control unit (a payout control substrate 120) for performing application control of a ball and award medals; Setting change means for controlling to a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined information stored in the first information storage means when the setting change state is ended. First initialization means for initializing stored information (information other than the setting value area of the game RWM area), and initialization for the provision control means along with the initialization of predetermined stored information of the first information storage means Information And a second information storage unit (payout RAM 121c) for storing storage information associated with the assignment control, and the initialization information receiving unit. Then, there is provided a second initialization means for initializing predetermined storage information (information other than the launch permission flag area of the RWM area) stored in the second information storage means. In addition, the game control means (the main control board 110) which controls the progress of the game, and the grant control which performs the grant control of the game bonus (a prize ball, a prize medal) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means Means (a payout control board 120), and the game control means is any of a first information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing memory information associated with the progress control, and any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) Setting change means for controlling to a setting change state which can be set as is, and predetermined storage information stored in the first information storage means when controlling to the setting change state (other than the setting value area of the game RWM area) And initialization of transmitting initialization information (power on designation command) to the application control means along with the initialization of predetermined storage information of the first information storage means. information A second information storage unit (disbursement RAM 121c) for storing storage information associated with the addition control, and the storage unit stores the second information storage unit upon receiving the initialization information. And second initialization means for initializing predetermined stored information (information other than the launch permission flag area of the RWM area). By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  A twenty-first structure for solving the above-mentioned problems includes a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and the game control means stores information stored in memory information associated with the progress control. Means (main RAM 110c), a setting change means for controlling to a setting change state which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the information storage means when ending the setting change state And an initialization means for initializing predetermined stored information (information other than the setting value area of the game RWM area), the information storage means initializing the stored information by the initialization means There is one storage area (an area other than the setting value area of the gaming RWM area) and a second storage area (the information area of the information RWM area) in which the storage information is not initialized by the initialization means. There. Further, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means is an information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing memory information accompanying the progress control, and a plurality of setting values (main RAM 110c). 1 to 4), and setting storage means for controlling the setting change state which can be set to any of 4), and predetermined storage information (the game RWM area stored in the information storage means when the setting change state is controlled. An initialization unit configured to initialize information other than the set value area; the information storage unit is a first storage area (set value area of the game RWM area) in which the stored information is initialized by the initialization unit; There is a region other than the above, and a second storage region (a region for information of the RWM region for information) in which the stored information is not initialized by the initialization means. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  A twenty-second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems includes game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game control means is any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4). And setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to, and gaming information (normal out number, normal middle payout number) generated in the game in a predetermined game section to calculate specific information (normal base value) The information calculation means and the information display means for displaying the specific information on the information display unit (the information display 113), the information calculation means is configured to change the setting value in the predetermined game section The above-mentioned specific information is calculated based on the game information of the game played before the change and the game information of the game played after the change. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the twenty-third configuration includes game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and the game control means is any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) And setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to, and gaming information (normal out number, normal middle payout number) generated in the game in a predetermined game section to calculate specific information (normal base value) The information calculation means and the information display means for displaying the specific information on the information display unit, the information calculation means does not change due to the change of the set value (normal out number, normal out payment Number) is collected as the game information. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting control means for controlling the setting change state in which the game control means can set any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and Abnormality detection means for detecting that an abnormality (incorrect winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) has occurred, and the effect control means Transmitting means for transmitting control information (setting change designating command) and transmitting second control information (error designating command) in response to detection of the predetermined abnormality; and the effect control means includes the first control A setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of information, and the predetermined display unit is notified of an abnormality in response to the reception of the second control information. An image (illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) is displayed, and the abnormal notification image is not displayed while the setting change image is displayed. . By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting control means for controlling the setting change state in which the game control means can set any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and Abnormality determination means for determining the occurrence of an abnormality (incorrect prize error, abnormal prize error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state (Transmission means for transmitting a setting change designation command), and transmitting second control information (error designation command) in response to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality; and the effect control means comprises the first control information. The setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed on the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) along with the communication, and the abnormality notification image (on the predetermined display unit according to the reception of the second control information) Display an incorrect winning error image, an abnormal winning error image, a magnetic error image, a radio error image, a door opening error image, etc.) and the game control means does not determine the occurrence of the predetermined error in the setting change state. It has become. In addition, game control means (main control board 110) which controls the progress of the game, and effect control means (effect control board 130) which controls the effect of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means , And the game control means controls the setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and predetermined abnormality (incorrect prize error, abnormal prize error, magnetism) An abnormality determination unit that determines the occurrence of an error, a radio wave error, a door opening error, etc., and the first control information (a setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control unit with the start of the setting change state. The transmission control unit for transmitting the second control information (error designation command) in response to the occurrence of the abnormality, the effect control unit including the predetermined display unit (the first image in response to the reception of the first control information). Display 70) the setting change image (setting changing screen) is displayed, and upon notification of the second control information, an abnormality notification image (incorrect prize error image, abnormal prize error image, magnetic error image, etc.) on the predetermined display unit. The radio wave error image, the door open error image, etc. are displayed, and the game control means is configured to be able to determine the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state, and the effect control means displays the setting change image When the second control information is received during the setting, the setting change image is preferentially displayed. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the game effect control based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Setting control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting control means for controlling the setting change state in which the game control means can set any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and Abnormality detection means for detecting that an abnormality (incorrect winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) has occurred, and the effect control means The control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted, and the second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the detection of the predetermined abnormality is performed. 3) Transmission means for transmitting control information (error designation command); and the effect control means is configured to change the setting on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receipt of the first control information. (Displaying setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and the abnormality notification image (in the predetermined display unit is received in response to the reception of the third control information). Unauthorized winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) are displayed, and while displaying the setting change image, display of the abnormal notification image is impossible, and the setting After the display of the change image is finished, the display of the abnormality notification image is possible. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting control means for controlling the setting change state which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and the power supply control means Initial processing means for executing initial processing (processing for power recovery) based on input, and transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means along with the end of the setting change state, and the third control information (power restoration specification command) is sent to the effect control means along with the end of the initial process. And the effect control means sends the setting change image (the setting change screen) to the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. A plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit according to the reception of the second control information, and a plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit according to the reception of the third control information. The same effect symbols (initial effect symbols "135" as the plurality of effect symbols displayed with the reception of the second control information and the plurality of effect symbols displayed with the reception of the third control information ). By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means Control means (effect control board 130) for performing the setting control means for controlling the setting change state which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and the power supply control means Initial processing means for executing initial processing (processing for power recovery) based on input, and transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means along with the end of the setting change state, and the third control information (power restoration specification command) is sent to the effect control means along with the end of the initial process. And the effect control means sends the setting change image (the setting change screen) to the predetermined display unit (the first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. A plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit according to the reception of the second control information, and a plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit according to the reception of the third control information. When one of the plurality of effect modes (rendering modes A to G) is displayed when the plurality of effect symbols are displayed on the predetermined display unit, the effect mode of one of the effect modes is displayed, and the second control information is received The effect mode to be displayed along with the effect mode to be displayed along with the reception of the third control information is the same effect mode (effect mode A). By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, there is provided a setting change means for controlling a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (a game medium to a starting opening Determination of whether to execute the first special game (small hit game) advantageous to the player or the second special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the first special game based on the achievement of The type of the first special game is determined when it is determined that the first special game is to be executed, and the variable display means for executing the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the means and the determination result of the determination means. And a second determining means for determining the type of the second special game when it is determined to execute the second special game, and the determining means is set by the setting changing means. According to the set value, the second special Whether or not to execute the technique is determined (as the jackpot winning probability is different), regardless of the set value set by the setting change means, whether to execute the first special game (small hit elected The second determination means determines the type of the first special game regardless of the setting value set by the setting changing means. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

  As a thirtieth configuration for solving the above problems, there is provided a setting change means for controlling a setting change state which can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (a game medium to a starting opening Of the special symbol on the basis of the determination of whether to execute the special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player based on the achievement of The variable display device includes: variable display means to be executed; and determination means for determining the type of the special game when it is determined to execute the special game, the determination means corresponding to the set value set by the setting change means To determine whether or not to execute the special game (as the jackpot winning probability is different), the type of the special game and the ratio to determine each special game, to the setting value set by the setting change means Regardless of That. By doing this, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the game.

(Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment)
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of giving gaming benefits (a prize ball, a medal, value data, etc.) according to the result of the game is generally used. Among such gaming machines, there have been gaming machines that display information indicating the setting value (theoretical value) of gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, JP-A-2016-116898). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that only the setting value (theoretical value) of the performance of the gaming machine is displayed, and information on the actual performance of the gaming machine can not be grasped. The

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, the conditions for giving (in entering the game ball to various winning openings, on the effective line, by the game using the game value (game ball, medal, value data, etc.) The state control means (main control) capable of controlling any of a plurality of gaming states in a gaming machine capable of awarding a predetermined amount of gaming value to the player as a prize when the winning symbol arrangement is satisfied. Substrate 110), zone switching means (main control board 110) capable of switching the game zone according to the execution of the game, and the amount of used gaming value while in a predetermined gaming state in one game zone Information calculation means (main control board 110) capable of calculating specific game information (normal base value) using the number of normal outs) and the amount of granted game value (the number of normal middle payouts), and the current game section Specific play in Information includes a notification condition (normal base value "33" or less) and a specific notification satisfies (based alert notification) can be of executing notification executing means (performance control board 130), the. By doing this, it becomes possible to grasp information on the actual performance of the gaming machine.

と し て As a second configuration to solve the above problems, the conditions for awarding (entering the game ball to various winning openings, and on the effective line) by the game using the game value (game ball, medal, value data, etc.) The state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states in a gaming machine which grants the player a predetermined amount of gaming value as a prize when , Section switching means (main control board 110) capable of switching the game section according to the execution of the game, and the amount of used gaming value while in a predetermined gaming state in one game section (normal out Information calculation means (main control board 110) capable of calculating specific game information (normal base value) using the) and the granted game value (usually the number of middle payouts), and the specific game information is displayed in a predetermined manner Means (information indicator 13) information display means (main control board 110) which can be displayed, the information display means, the specified game information in the current game section, and the specification in a plurality of past game sections The game information is displayed in a predetermined order. By doing this, it becomes possible to grasp information on the actual performance of the gaming machine.

◆ As the third configuration for solving the above problems, the conditions for giving (in entering the game balls to various winning openings, entry on the effective line) by the game using the game value (game balls, medals, value data, etc.) The state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states in a gaming machine which grants the player a predetermined amount of gaming value as a prize when , Section switching means (main control board 110) capable of switching the game section according to the execution of the game, and the amount of used gaming value while in a predetermined gaming state in one game section (normal out Information calculation means (main control board 110) capable of calculating specific game information (normal base value) using the) and the granted game value (usually the number of middle payouts), and the specific game information is displayed in a predetermined manner Means (information indicator And capable of information display means to display 13) (the main control board 110), wherein the information obtaining means is configured not to calculate the specific game information in initial game segment. By doing this, it becomes possible to grasp information on the actual performance of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game changes according to the type of big hit game (big hit special symbol) and the big hit game state, but all the big hit games It is good also as a game machine made to shift to a high probability time short game state after an end, and to shift to a low probability non-time short game state or a low probability time short game state if variable display of a predetermined number of times is performed. In this case, regardless of the set value, the number of times of the variable display executed in the high probability time short game state may be made the same, or the change for each set value so that the continuation rate of the high probability time short game state becomes the same. You may set the number of times of display.

  In addition, when it is made to shift to the high probability gaming state after the end of all the big hit games, and winning the fall lottery executed at the start of the variation display of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is ended usually It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the specific area provided inside the big winning opening in the specific round game of the big hit game, transition to the high probability time short game state after the end of the big hit game, the game ball passes the specific area If not, the gaming machine may be shifted to the low probability time short gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed. Although it is assumed that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel), it may be a gaming machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and a winning symbol is stop-displayed on an effective line by a game using medals (game media) as a gaming value (conditions for giving) Also, it can be used for a roll-to-roll type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) capable of awarding a predetermined amount of award medals to a player. Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 game machine 5 game board 44 common drawing gate 45 1st starting opening 47 2nd starting opening 50 1st big winning opening 53 2nd big winning opening 70 1st image display 71 71 2nd image display 110 main control board 110a main CPU
120 payout control board 130 effect control board 130 a sub CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of awarding a predetermined amount of gaming value as a prize to a player when the award condition is satisfied by a game using a gaming value,
State control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of gaming states;
Section switching means capable of switching the game section according to the execution of the game;
Information calculation means capable of calculating specific game information using the amount of used gaming value and the amount of granted gaming value while in a predetermined gaming state in one game section;
Information display means capable of displaying the specific game information on a predetermined display means;
A game machine characterized in that the information calculation means does not calculate the specific game information in the first game section.